- All categories
Welcome to Wikbeauty
Main menu
-
SHOP All
-
Shop by Category
- Shop by Category
-
Body Contouring & Fat Reduction
-
Facial & Skin Rejuvenation
-
Recovery & Circulation Therapy
-
Bestsellers
Your cart
Product Comparison
Describe you product comparison grid
|
__ __ |
|
|---|---|
| Vendor |
Vendor - __ |
| SKU |
SKU - __ |
| Description |
Description - __ |
| Customizable title |
Customizable title - __ |
| Variant name |
Variant name - __ |
|
|
Compare products ( / )
All Product collection
All Product collection
Transform Every Treatment
From fat reduction to facial rejuvenation, our professional-grade equipment is built to elevate every service on your menu, giving clients real results and your business a competitive edge.
74 products
74 products
Sort by:
- Featured
- Most relevant
- Best selling
- Alphabetically, A-Z
- Alphabetically, Z-A
- Price, low to high
- Price, high to low
- Date, old to new
- Date, new to old
From $2,599.00
Professional 5D Lipo Laser System
Five-Wavelength Technology for Non-Invasive Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is a professional body-contouring system developed for beauty studios, wellness centers and qualified independent practitioners.
Combining five laser wavelengths with an adjustable multi-pad design, the system enables trained operators to create customized treatments for the abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back and other commonly requested body areas.
Available in vertical and portable configurations, the machine provides a practical balance of treatment flexibility, operator control and client comfort.
Five wavelengths | Up to 14 pads | 15 energy levels | Vertical or portable
Advanced Five-Wavelength Technology The system integrates five laser wavelengths within one professional platform: 650 nm 780 nm 808 nm 940 nm 980 nm This multi-wavelength configuration provides greater versatility than a conventional single-wavelength system. Treatment parameters can be adjusted according to the selected area, professional protocol and individual client requirements. Each treatment pad contains 28 diode lasers, depending on the configuration selected, with an output of up to 209 mW per diode. Key Product Advantages Multi-Wavelength System
Five available wavelengths provide greater flexibility when developing professional body-contouring protocols. Adjustable Treatment Parameters
Fifteen energy levels, adjustable pulse timing and continuous or pulsed modes allow the operator to customize each session. Flexible Pad Configuration
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 treatment pads. Independent Pad Cooling
Each treatment pad features an independent wind-cooling system to support stable performance during operation. Multiple Equipment Formats
Choose a vertical unit for a permanent treatment room or a portable unit for smaller spaces and more flexible working arrangements. International Compatibility
The system is available in 110 V and 220 V versions, with US, UK, EU and AU plug options. Professional Body-Contouring Applications The 5D Lipo Laser Machine is designed for non-invasive aesthetic treatments focused on improving the appearance of body contours. Common treatment areas include: Treatment suitability, pad placement and operating parameters should be determined by a trained operator following a complete client consultation. How the System Works The treatment pads are positioned securely over the selected body area using adjustable straps. The operator then selects the treatment duration, energy level and pulse mode according to the recommended protocol. The pads deliver controlled low-level laser energy to the treatment area without surgical incisions, injections or anesthesia. Sessions are designed to be comfortable and generally do not require a surgical recovery period. The system should be used as part of a structured body-contouring program. Individual outcomes vary according to body composition, lifestyle, treatment frequency and the protocol applied. Configurable Treatment-Pad System Large Treatment Pads
The six large pads provide wider coverage for areas such as the abdomen, waist, back, thighs and buttocks. Small Treatment Pads
The two small pads are designed for more targeted placement on areas such as the upper arms and smaller localized zones. Optional Expansion
Selected machine configurations can support up to 14 pads. This provides additional flexibility when covering larger areas or developing multi-pad protocols. Additional treatment pads are sold separately. Compatibility should be confirmed before purchase. Vertical and Portable Options Vertical Configuration
The vertical model provides a refined, professional presentation for dedicated treatment rooms. Its mobile base allows the equipment to be repositioned within the working area when necessary. Recommended for: Beauty studios Aesthetic clinics Body-contouring centers Permanent treatment rooms Higher-volume treatment environments Portable Configuration
The portable model offers a more compact footprint while retaining the core multi-pad functionality of the system. Recommended for: Independent practitioners Smaller studios Limited treatment spaces Professionals requiring easier storage or transportation Controlled, Client-Focused Operation
The system offers adjustable parameters to support professional operation and individual client comfort. Energy adjustment from level 1 to 15 Pulse-time adjustment from 0.1 to 5 seconds Continuous and pulsed operating modes Adjustable session duration Touchscreen control interface Independent cooling for each pad Secure pad-positioning straps IC-card control system Treatment duration may range from approximately 15 to 60 minutes, depending on the selected area and treatment protocol. Technical Specifications Product specifications may vary according to the selected configuration. Confirm the final specification sheet with Wikbeauty before ordering. Standard Package Contents The standard package includes: One 5D Lipo Laser main unit Six large treatment pads Two small treatment pads Treatment-pad connection cables Adjustable securing straps Protective eyewear Power cable with selected plug English user manual Setup and operating guidance Optional pads and accessories can be added according to the selected system configuration. Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides guidance to help buyers understand: Equipment installation Basic system operation Treatment-parameter selection Pad positioning Routine cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Recommended safety procedures Intended Users
This system is designed for professional use by: Aesthetic practitioners Body-contouring specialists Beauty-studio owners Wellness professionals Trained independent operators Qualified entrepreneurs establishing a treatment business Safety and Contraindications A complete consultation and suitability assessment should be performed before every treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Uncontrolled medical conditions Active skin infections Open wounds in the treatment area Photosensitivity or the use of photosensitizing medication Other conditions identified in the operating manual This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied user manual, relevant professional standards and applicable local regulations. Clients should seek medical advice when treatment suitability is uncertain. Why Professionals Choose Wikbeauty Specialized Beauty-Equipment Supply
Wikbeauty provides professional aesthetic and body-contouring equipment to international buyers. Configurable Equipment
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and number of treatment pads according to your operating requirements. International Electrical Options
The system can be prepared for different markets with 110 V or 220 V operation and the appropriate regional plug. Operating Assistance
Support is available for installation, initial setup, routine operation and basic troubleshooting. Direct Purchasing
Buy directly from the equipment supplier and receive assistance when confirming the most appropriate configuration. Frequently Asked Questions
Is this a professional or home-use machine?
This is professional beauty equipment. It should be operated by a trained individual who understands consultation procedures, contraindications, treatment parameters and equipment safety. What is the standard pad configuration?
The standard system includes six large pads and two small pads. Compatible configurations can be expanded to a maximum of 14 pads. What is the difference between the large and small pads?
Large pads provide broader coverage for areas such as the abdomen, back and thighs. Small pads enable more targeted placement on the arms and other localized areas. Should I choose the vertical or portable version?
The vertical model is suitable for a dedicated professional treatment room. The portable model is better suited to smaller spaces or operators who require easier storage and transportation. How long does a session take?
A session may last approximately 15–60 minutes. Duration varies according to the treatment area, pad configuration, operating parameters and professional protocol. Is there a recovery period?
The treatment is non-invasive and does not involve surgical incisions. Clients can generally resume normal daily activities after a session, subject to individual circumstances and professional guidance. Are results guaranteed?
No aesthetic treatment can guarantee identical results for every person. Outcomes may vary depending on the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment schedule and the protocol used. Can I order additional treatment pads?
Additional pads may be purchased for compatible configurations. Confirm the maximum number of supported pads before ordering. Which voltage should I select?
Select the voltage that matches the electrical standard in your country. If uncertain, contact Wikbeauty before completing your purchase. Configure Your 5D Lipo Laser System
Select the machine format, voltage, plug and treatment-pad configuration that best suits your professional requirements. For assistance choosing between the vertical and portable models, contact Wikbeauty before placing your order. Three-Year Warranty
Your Wikbeauty 5D Lipo Laser Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing additional confidence in your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the warranty terms, coverage includes manufacturing defects and eligible failures involving: Main machine components Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Treatment-pad connections Other eligible parts supplied with the original machine Technical Support
If a covered technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty’s support team will help you: Identify the issue through remote technical assessment Complete basic troubleshooting Determine whether a replacement part or repair is required Receive guidance for installing eligible replacement components Warranty Conditions
The warranty applies to defects arising under normal and proper use. It does not cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse or incorrect operation Unauthorized modification or repair Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of consumable parts and accessories Damage caused during unauthorized transportation Failure to follow the supplied operating instructions The original order information and machine serial number may be required when requesting warranty service. Full coverage is subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty terms. Three years of warranty coverage. Professional technical assistance. Long-term confidence in your purchase. Select Your Configuration and Add to Cart Explore the complete range of professional lipo laser machines.
Treatment area
Typical application
Abdomen
Abdominal contouring
Waist and flanks
Waistline definition
Upper and lower back
Localized body contouring
Upper arms
Arm-contouring treatments
Inner and outer thighs
Thigh shaping
Buttocks
Contour-focused treatments
Legs and calves
Localized lower-body treatments
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional 5D lipo laser machine
Technology
Low-level diode laser
Laser wavelengths
650 nm, 780 nm, 808 nm, 940 nm and 980 nm
Diode output
Up to 209 mW per diode
Diodes per pad
28 on big and 3 on a small pad
Standard configuration
6 large pads and 2 small pads
Maximum configuration
Up to 14 treatment pads
Energy adjustment
Levels 1–15
Pulse-time range
0.1–5 seconds
Operating modes
Continuous and pulsed
Treatment duration
Approximately 15–60 minutes
Cooling system
Independent wind cooling for each pad
Control interface
Touchscreen
Additional control
IC-card system
Equipment options
Vertical or portable
Voltage options
110 V or 220 V
Plug options
US, UK, EU and AU
Receives in 7 days.
From $1,999.00
Professional 5-in-1 HIFU and RF Microneedling System
Five Dedicated Technologies for Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine combines five professional aesthetic technologies within one compact desktop platform.
Dedicated handles for 8D HIFU, Liposonic Thermal Sculpting, Radar Carving, Gold RF Microneedling and Intimate HIFU allow trained professionals to develop facial lifting, skin-rejuvenation, body-contouring and intimate-care services from one system.
A 15-inch intelligent touchscreen, adjustable energy settings and interchangeable cartridges provide controlled operation across different treatment areas and protocols.
Five technologies | Five dedicated handles | 15-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Five Professional Technologies in One Machine 8D HIFU
The 8D HIFU handle delivers multiple focused-ultrasound treatment lines with each activation. It includes: 3.0 mm cartridge at 7 MHz 4.5 mm cartridge at 4 MHz These cartridge depths support professional protocols focused on facial lifting, skin firming, jawline definition and suitable neck treatments. The supplied specification indicates up to 12 treatment lines per activation and up to 10,000 shots per cartridge, depending on the cartridge and operating configuration. Liposonic Thermal Sculpting
The Liposonic handle provides deeper focused-energy delivery for appropriately selected body areas. It includes: 8.0 mm cartridge 13.0 mm cartridge Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Waist and flanks Upper and lower back Upper arms Thighs Hips Buttocks Cartridge selection must be based on the client’s anatomy, tissue thickness and professional treatment protocol. Radar Carving
The Radar Carving handle supports controlled treatments at three selectable depths: 1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm It can be incorporated into professional protocols focused on skin firming, facial contour refinement and selected face or neck applications. Gold RF Microneedling
The Gold RF Microneedling handle combines controlled needle penetration with radiofrequency energy. It includes: 10-pin cartridge 25-pin cartridge The needles create controlled microchannels while RF energy is delivered at the selected depth. This technology can support treatments focused on: Skin-texture improvement Fine-line appearance Enlarged-pore appearance Uneven-looking skin tone Acne-scar appearance General skin rejuvenation RF microneedling is minimally invasive and requires strict hygiene, infection-control and aftercare procedures. Intimate HIFU
The dedicated Intimate HIFU handle delivers focused ultrasound through a 360° treatment format. It includes: 3.0 mm cartridge 4.5 mm cartridge This handle is designed for specialized professional intimate-care protocols where legally permitted. It must only be used by appropriately qualified professionals following consultation, informed consent, privacy, hygiene and safety requirements. Multi-Line 8D HIFU Delivery
The 8D HIFU handle is designed to deliver up to 12 treatment lines per activation. Compared with a conventional single-line system, this may provide: More efficient treatment-area coverage More consistent line placement Reduced repetitive repositioning Streamlined facial treatment workflows Greater coverage across appropriate areas “8D” is the commercial name of the treatment platform. It should not be interpreted as meaning the handle delivers exactly eight lines. Multi-line delivery does not remove the need for correct spacing, safe energy selection or professional knowledge of facial anatomy. Treatment Handles and Cartridge Depths The correct handle, cartridge and parameters must be selected according to the treatment area, client suitability and professional protocol. Professional Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications Individual results vary according to client condition, tissue depth, treatment settings, treatment frequency and biological response. How the Technologies Work Focused Ultrasound
The 8D HIFU, Liposonic, Radar Carving and Intimate HIFU handles deliver focused energy to a selected depth below the surface. When applied correctly, the controlled focal points support the body’s natural tissue-remodeling and collagen-response processes. Radiofrequency Microneedling
The Gold RF Microneedling handle uses fine needles to deliver radiofrequency energy at a controlled depth. This produces a targeted treatment response designed to support collagen remodeling and improvement in the appearance of skin texture. RF microneedling is not a laser treatment and does not rely on light energy. Build a Complete Professional Service Menu
Facial Lifting and Firming
Use the 8D HIFU handle for professional face, jawline and suitable neck protocols. Skin-Rejuvenation Treatments
The Gold RF Microneedling handle adds targeted services focused on texture, pores, fine lines and scar appearance. Body-Contouring Services
The 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm Liposonic cartridges support treatments for appropriately selected body areas. Contour-Refinement Treatments
The Radar Carving handle provides three depth options for focused facial and body protocols. Intimate Wellness Services
The Intimate HIFU handle enables qualified providers to add specialized services where permitted within their professional scope. Combination Treatment Planning
Qualified operators may develop plans using more than one technology where appropriate. Treatment sequence, compatibility and intervals must follow professional training and manufacturer protocols. Compact Professional Desktop Design
The system combines five treatment technologies in a desktop housing measuring approximately 58 × 44 × 44 cm. Key operating features include: 15-inch intelligent color touchscreen Five dedicated treatment handles Pre-programmed treatment modes Adjustable energy from 0.1–3.0 J Temperature monitoring Automatic shut-off Adjustable operating limits AC 110–240 V compatibility Approximately 19 kg net weight The machine should be installed on a stable treatment trolley or work surface with sufficient ventilation. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, treatment goals, medical history, tissue condition and contraindications. Intimate treatments require additional privacy, informed-consent and professional-scope procedures. 2. Handle Selection
The appropriate handle is selected according to whether the treatment focuses on lifting, skin rejuvenation, body contouring or intimate care. 3. Cartridge Selection
The operator installs the cartridge or microneedling tip appropriate for the treatment area. 4. Treatment Preparation
The area is cleansed and prepared. Conductive gel or another approved coupling material is applied where required. Sterile preparation and single-use needle cartridges are required for RF microneedling. 5. Parameter Selection
Energy, depth, delivery mode and other settings are selected according to the approved protocol. 6. Controlled Treatment
The treatment is performed using correct placement and technique while monitoring client comfort and tissue response. 7. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives technology-specific aftercare instructions. Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, tenderness, tingling or pinpoint crusting may occur. Recovery experience varies between treatments and clients. Technical Specifications
The stated 60–70°C figure refers to the manufacturer-specified focal thermal setting. It must not be interpreted as a safe surface temperature or used without the supplied professional protocol. Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration. What Is Included?
Main Equipment
One 5-in-1 desktop touchscreen console One 8D HIFU handle One Liposonic Thermal Sculpting handle One Radar Carving handle One Gold RF Microneedling handle One Intimate HIFU handle Universal power cable Starter conductive gel 8D HIFU Cartridges
3.0 mm 4.5 mm Liposonic Cartridges
8.0 mm 13.0 mm Radar Carving Cartridges
1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Intimate HIFU Cartridges
3.0 mm 4.5 mm RF Microneedling Tips
10-pin 25-pin Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate RoHS certificate Installation and setup guidance Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine comes with: CE Certificate RoHS Certificate These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote training and operating guidance covering: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation 8D HIFU operation Liposonic operation Radar Carving operation RF Microneedling operation Intimate HIFU operation Handle and cartridge installation Basic treatment-parameter selection Hygiene and infection-control procedures Facial, body and intimate-care protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting Training supports equipment familiarization but does not replace professional qualifications, anatomy training, intimate-care training or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects affecting: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Original treatment handles Temperature-monitoring system Handle connectors Other eligible original components Eligible repair labor during the warranty period Cartridges, microneedling tips and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part or repair assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, disinfection or storage Damage caused by dropping a handle Normal cartridge or tip depletion Reuse of single-use microneedling tips Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty support. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and must only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation, informed-consent process and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment. Depending on the selected technology, treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Metallic implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds Severe skin conditions Conditions affecting normal healing Recent surgery in the treatment area Recent injectable treatments Use of medication affecting healing or bleeding Other contraindications listed in the operating manual RF Microneedling Safety
RF microneedling requires appropriate disinfection and infection-control procedures. Single-use needle cartridges must not be reused. Intimate HIFU Safety
Intimate treatments require specialist training, privacy safeguards, informed consent and strict hygiene controls. Operators must confirm that intimate treatments are permitted within their professional scope and local regulations. Incorrect depth, temperature or placement can cause tissue injury. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Beauty salons Skin-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring centers Qualified intimate-care providers Appropriately trained independent practitioners The machine is not intended for casual or unsupervised home use. Why Choose This 5-in-1 System?
Five Dedicated Treatment Technologies
Provide professional facial lifting, skin rejuvenation, body contouring and intimate-care services from one platform. Efficient Multi-Line HIFU
The 8D HIFU handle can deliver up to 12 treatment lines per activation for efficient area coverage. Professional RF Microneedling
The 10-pin and 25-pin tips support precise, depth-controlled skin-rejuvenation protocols. Face and Body Depth Options
Cartridges range from 1.5 mm for superficial protocols to 13.0 mm for deeper body applications. Compact Desktop Format
Five treatment technologies are integrated within a system weighing approximately 19 kg. Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What does “5-in-1” mean?
The system combines 8D HIFU, Liposonic Thermal Sculpting, Radar Carving, Gold RF Microneedling and Intimate HIFU. Each technology has a dedicated handle. How is 8D HIFU different from conventional HIFU?
The 8D handle can deliver multiple treatment lines per activation, providing more efficient coverage than a conventional single-line system. Does “8D” mean eight treatment lines?
No. “8D” is the commercial name of the system. The supplied specification indicates up to 12 treatment lines per activation. Is RF microneedling non-invasive?
No. RF microneedling is minimally invasive because the needles penetrate the skin. Appropriate hygiene and post-treatment care are required. What is Radar Carving used for?
The Radar Carving handle includes 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for professional firming and contour-refinement protocols. What is the Liposonic handle used for?
The 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm Liposonic cartridges are intended for body-contouring treatments on appropriately selected areas. Is there any downtime?
Recovery varies by technology. RF microneedling may produce temporary redness, swelling or pinpoint crusting. Ultrasound treatments may cause temporary sensitivity, tenderness or swelling. How many sessions will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the technology, treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed result should not be promised. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components and eligible repair labor. Cartridges, tips, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded. Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Expand Your Face, Body and Intimate-Care Services
The Wikbeauty 5-in-1 8D HIFU Machine combines: 8D HIFU Liposonic Thermal Sculpting Radar Carving Gold RF Microneedling Intimate HIFU Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, delivery information and purchasing assistance. Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Technology
Included cartridges
Primary application
8D HIFU
3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Facial lifting and skin firming
Liposonic
8.0 mm and 13.0 mm
Professional body contouring
Radar Carving
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Contour refinement and firming
Gold RF Microneedling
10-pin and 25-pin
Skin-texture and rejuvenation protocols
Intimate HIFU
3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Specialized intimate-care treatments
Treatment category
Common areas
Applicable technology
Facial lifting
Face and lower face
8D HIFU
Jawline definition
Jawline and submental area
8D HIFU or Radar Carving
Neck firming
Suitable neck areas
8D HIFU or Radar Carving
Skin rejuvenation
Face and selected body areas
Gold RF Microneedling
Body contouring
Abdomen, waist, back and thighs
Liposonic
Contour refinement
Selected facial and body areas
Radar Carving
Intimate care
Intimate treatment area
Intimate HIFU
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional 5-in-1 HIFU and RF Microneedling system
Machine design
Black desktop housing
Control interface
15-inch intelligent color touchscreen
Treatment handles
Five dedicated handles
Included technologies
8D HIFU, Liposonic, Radar Carving, Gold RF Microneedling and Intimate HIFU
8D HIFU cartridges
3.0 mm at 7 MHz and 4.5 mm at 4 MHz
Liposonic cartridges
8.0 mm and 13.0 mm
Radar Carving cartridges
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Intimate HIFU cartridges
3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
RF Microneedling tips
10-pin and 25-pin
Adjustable energy
0.1–3.0 J
Multi-line output
Up to 12 lines per activation
Cartridge capacity
Up to 10,000 shots, depending on cartridge
Intimate probe focal thermal setting
Manufacturer-stated 60–70°C focal range
Rated voltage
AC 110–240 V
Machine dimensions
58 × 44 × 44 cm
Net weight
Approximately 19 kg
Safety features
Automatic shut-off, temperature monitoring and adjustable operating limits
Certifications
CE and RoHS certified
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor
Receives in 7 days.
$1,499.00
Professional 12D Focused Ultrasound System
Seven Cartridge Depths for Facial Firming and Body-Contouring Applications
The Wikbeauty HIFU 12D New Gold TT is a professional focused-ultrasound system with three treatment handles and seven interchangeable cartridge depths.
Four facial cartridges—1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm—support professionally planned facial and neck treatments. Three deeper cartridges—6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm—are intended for appropriately selected body areas.
Single and multi-line operating modes provide flexibility for targeted energy placement and broader treatment-area coverage.
Three treatment handles | Seven cartridge depths | 10,000 shots per cartridge | Three-year warranty
Separate Facial and Body Cartridge Systems The seven cartridges must be divided clearly between facial and body applications. Facial Cartridges
1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Body Cartridges
6.0 mm 9.0 mm 13.0 mm The 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges should not be marketed for facial treatment. These depths are intended for body areas with sufficient tissue thickness. A 13.0 mm cartridge must never be used on the face. Four Facial Treatment Depths 1.5 mm — Superficial Facial Applications
The 1.5 mm cartridge operates at a supplied frequency of 5.5 MHz and is intended for suitable superficial facial areas. Potential professional applications include: Superficial skin-firming protocols Fine-line appearance Skin-texture refinement Suitable areas of the forehead and cheeks 2.0 mm — Precision Facial Applications
The 2.0 mm cartridge also uses a supplied frequency of 5.5 MHz. It may support precise treatment of appropriately selected facial areas, including suitable tissue around—but never directly over—the eyes. Operators must understand orbital anatomy and follow all prohibited treatment zones. 3.0 mm — Mid-Depth Facial Applications
The 3.0 mm cartridge is intended for controlled treatment within suitable facial and neck tissue. Potential applications include: Facial skin firming Cheek treatments Lower-face contour refinement Suitable neck areas Collagen-remodeling protocols 4.5 mm — Deeper Facial Applications
The 4.5 mm cartridge operates at a supplied frequency of 4 MHz and is intended for appropriately selected deeper facial areas. Potential professional applications include: Lower-face firming Jawline definition Submental-area protocols Suitable neck treatments Three Body Treatment Depths 6.0 mm — Shallow Body Applications
The 6.0 mm cartridge is intended for selected body areas with sufficient tissue depth. It is not a pore-refinement cartridge and should not be used as a superficial facial option. 9.0 mm — Medium-Depth Body Applications
The 9.0 mm cartridge operates at a supplied frequency of 2 MHz and is intended for professional body protocols. Potential areas may include: Abdomen Flanks Upper arms Thighs Other approved body areas 13.0 mm — Deeper Body Applications
The 13.0 mm cartridge operates at a supplied frequency of 2 MHz and is intended only for body areas with appropriate tissue thickness. Incorrect use on thin tissue or facial areas could expose nerves, blood vessels, muscles or other structures to unintended thermal or mechanical injury. Three Professional Treatment Handles 5.5 MHz Handle
Designed for the 1.5 mm and 2.0 mm cartridges used in suitable superficial and precision facial protocols. 4 MHz Handle
Designed for the 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges used in mid-depth and deeper facial applications. 2 MHz Handle
Designed for the 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges used in approved body protocols. Handle and cartridge compatibility should always follow the supplied user manual. Single and Multi-Line Operating Modes Single Mode
Single mode supports controlled placement in targeted treatment areas. It may be useful for: Smaller facial zones Detailed contour planning Areas requiring careful line placement Customized professional protocols Multi-Line Mode
Multi-line mode supports broader treatment-area coverage and more efficient line delivery. It may be useful for: Larger facial areas Body-treatment zones Structured full-area protocols Clinics requiring efficient treatment workflows Multi-line delivery does not make the treatment hands-free. The operator must actively position and monitor the handpiece throughout treatment. How Focused Ultrasound Works The system delivers ultrasound energy to a defined focal depth beneath the skin’s surface. At the focal point, the energy creates controlled thermal and mechanical effects within the targeted tissue. This response may support gradual tissue remodeling and improvement in the appearance of skin firmness. Focused ultrasound does not provide a surgical facelift and should not be marketed as permanently changing facial anatomy. Individual outcomes vary according to: Client age Skin condition Tissue thickness Treatment area Cartridge depth Acoustic output Line placement Individual biological response Professional Face and Body Applications The treatment area must be assessed before selecting a cartridge. A deeper cartridge is not automatically more effective. Claims That Should Not Be Guaranteed
The HIFU 12D should not be advertised as providing: Guaranteed immediate lifting A surgical-facelift result Permanent wrinkle removal Permanent pore reduction Muscle tightening or muscle building Guaranteed collagen regeneration Zero risk of thermal damage Pain-free treatment for every client Zero downtime Safety for every skin type or medical condition Guaranteed body tightening after weight loss Fixed results within 2–4 week How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, previous aesthetic treatments, skin condition, tissue thickness and contraindications. 2. Treatment Mapping
Suitable treatment zones and prohibited areas are identified and marked. 3. Handle and Cartridge Selection
The operator chooses the correct facial or body handle and cartridge depth. 4. Skin Preparation
The area is cleansed, and an appropriate ultrasound coupling gel is applied to maintain complete contact. 5. Parameter Selection
Energy, line spacing, mode and treatment pattern are selected according to the area and professional protocol. 6. Test Delivery
Where specified by the protocol, a test line or low-energy application is performed to assess comfort and tissue response. 7. Controlled Treatment
The operator maintains full contact and actively controls handpiece placement throughout the session. 8. Post-Treatment Care
The area is cleaned and the client receives suitable aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling, numbness or discomfort may occur. Technical Specifications
“12D” is the commercial model name. It should not be interpreted as twelve treatment dimensions, depths or clinically proven advantages. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One HIFU 12D New Gold TT control system Three professional treatment handles Power cable suitable for the selected market Starter ultrasound coupling gel Required handle-connection accessories Facial Cartridges
One 1.5 mm cartridge One 2.0 mm cartridge One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge Body Cartridges
One 6.0 mm cartridge One 9.0 mm cartridge One 13.0 mm cartridge Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and setup guidance Handle and cartridge training Facial treatment guidance Body-treatment guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: Machine installation Handle identification Facial and body cartridge selection Cartridge installation Single and multi-line modes Treatment-area mapping Prohibited anatomical zones Basic parameter selection Coupling-gel application Treatment monitoring Cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not replace professional anatomy education, aesthetic qualifications or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Professional Warranty
The Wikbeauty HIFU 12D New Gold TT is supported by a three-year limited professional warranty. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main control system Internal electronic components Display and control interface Original treatment handles Handle connectors Other eligible original machine components Cartridges are limited-use components and may have separate warranty conditions. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Damage caused by dropping a handle Normal cartridge depletion Incorrect cartridge installation Operation without sufficient coupling gel Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the user manual All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
The HIFU 12D is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist assessment for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Active electronic implants Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Open wounds or active infection Severe skin disease in the treatment area Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Impaired sensation Recent surgery Recent injectable treatments Facial implants or threads Other contraindications listed in the user manual Prohibited Treatment Areas
Focused ultrasound must not be applied directly over: Eyes or eyelids Thyroid Major nerves Large blood vessels Bone surfaces Trachea Breast tissue Genitals Other areas prohibited by the device instructions Body-Cartridge Safety
The 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges must not be used on facial areas. Using an excessively deep cartridge can cause unintended thermal or mechanical injury. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The HIFU 12D system is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Beauty salons Facial-rejuvenation studios Professional body-contouring centers Qualified independent practitioners Appropriately trained healthcare professionals The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose HIFU 12D New Gold TT?
Seven Clearly Defined Depths
Four facial cartridges and three body cartridges support a broad range of professional applications. Three Frequency-Specific Handles
The 5.5 MHz, 4 MHz and 2 MHz handles support different compatible cartridge groups. Single and Multi-Line Modes
Choose targeted delivery or broader treatment-area coverage according to the professional protocol. High Cartridge Capacity
Each cartridge provides up to 10,000 shots according to the supplied specification. Universal Voltage
AC 110–240 V compatibility supports international installation. Professional Training
Remote setup, operating guidance and a training certificate are included. Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes a three-year limited professional warranty and remote technical assistance. Frequently Asked Questions
What makes this a “12D” HIFU machine?
“12D” is the commercial model name. The system’s measurable features are three handles, seven cartridge depths and single or multi-line operation. Are all seven cartridges intended for the face?
No. Only the 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges are facial options. The 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges are for appropriate body areas What is the difference between the three handles?
The 5.5 MHz handle supports shallower facial cartridges, the 4 MHz handle supports mid-depth and deeper facial cartridges, and the 2 MHz handle supports body cartridges. Can the system treat around the eyes?
Only suitable areas around the eyes may be treated by a properly trained operator using the correct cartridge and protocol. Energy must never be applied directly over the eye or eyelid. Are results immediate?
Some clients may notice an early change in firmness. Tissue-remodeling responses may develop progressively, and results vary between individuals. Is treatment painless?
No treatment experience is identical. Clients may experience warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort. Is there any downtime?
Some clients resume normal activities shortly afterward, but temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling or numbness may occur. How long does treatment take?
Treatment time depends on the area, mode, number of lines and professional protocol. A universal 20–30-minute duration should not be promised. Can the operator leave during treatment?
No. Focused-ultrasound treatment is not hands-free. The operator must actively control and monitor handpiece placement. Is training included?
Yes. Remote operating guidance and a training certificate are included. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Cartridge depletion, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded. Expand Your Professional Face and Body Services
The Wikbeauty HIFU 12D New Gold TT combines: Four facial cartridge depths Three body cartridge depths Three frequency-specific handles Single and multi-line operation Up to 10,000 shots per cartridge Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local requirements. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Treatment category
Suitable cartridges
Common areas
Superficial facial firming
1.5 mm
Suitable forehead and cheek areas
Precision facial treatment
2.0 mm
Appropriate facial areas
Facial contour refinement
3.0 mm
Cheeks, lower face and neck
Deeper facial firming
4.5 mm
Jawline, submental area and suitable neck areas
Shallow body treatment
6.0 mm
Approved body areas
Medium-depth body treatment
9.0 mm
Abdomen, arms, flanks and thighs
Deeper body treatment
13.0 mm
Areas with sufficient tissue thickness
Specification
Details
Product name
Wikbeauty HIFU 12D New Gold TT
Product type
Professional focused-ultrasound aesthetic system
Technology
Manufacturer-described micro-pulse focused ultrasound
Treatment handles
Three
Total cartridge depths
Seven
Facial cartridges
1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Body cartridges
6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm
Supplied frequencies
2 MHz, 4 MHz and 5.5 MHz
Cartridge capacity
Up to 20,000 shots per cartridge
Operating modes
Single and multi-line
Application format
Professional desktop system
Input voltage
AC 110–240 V
Treatment areas
Face, suitable neck areas and approved body areas
Warranty
Three-year limited professional warranty
Support
Professional training and remote technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$2,499.00
Professional 10-in-1 80K Cavitation and Vacuum RF System
Multi-Technology Body Contouring with a Complete Treatment Kit
The 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine is a multifunctional body-contouring platform developed for beauty salons, medical spas, aesthetic clinics and professional body-sculpting studios.
The system combines 80K ultrasonic cavitation, Vacuum RF, Multipolar RF, lipolaser plates and Inner Ball Roller vibration massage. Its comprehensive accessory kit includes seven professional handles, five massage heads, eight lipolaser plates and 29 vacuum cups.
Multiple technologies and applicator sizes allow trained practitioners to create customized programs for the abdomen, waist, thighs, upper arms, back, hips, legs and suitable face and neck areas.
Ten treatment functions | 80K cavitation | 29 vacuum cups | Three-year warranty
Five Core Technologies on One Professional Platform 80K Ultrasonic Cavitation
The 80K Cavitation Handle delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable body areas for professional non-invasive contour-refinement programs. Common applications include: Abdomen treatments Waist and flank programs Thigh treatments Upper-arm programs Hip and back treatments General body-contouring services Vacuum RF Therapy
The Vacuum RF function combines controlled suction with radiofrequency energy. Common applications include: Cellulite-appearance programs Skin-firming support Circulation-focused body care Vacuum massage Body-contour refinement General aesthetic treatments Multipolar RF
Multipolar RF delivers controlled thermal energy for professional skin-firming and texture-refinement programs. Common applications include: Loose-looking body skin Skin-firming support Texture-improvement programs Abdomen and thigh treatments Suitable facial protocols General rejuvenation services Lipolaser Plates
Eight lipolaser plates support professionally planned, multi-area body-contouring programs. Common applications include: Abdomen Waist and flanks Thighs Upper arms Back and hips Simultaneous multi-area treatments Inner Ball Roller Massage
The Inner Ball Roller provides controlled mechanical massage and vibration across selected body areas. Common applications include: Circulation-focused massage Temporary water-retention support Cellulite-appearance programs Muscle relaxation Post-treatment massage General body wellness The appropriate technology, applicator, energy setting, vacuum level and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client The system supports customized body-contouring pathways using one or more treatment technologies. Program 1: Abdomen and Waist Contouring
A body-focused program for suitable localized areas around the abdomen and waist. Recommended technologies: 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Multipolar RF Lipolaser Plates Inner Ball Roller Recommended for: Abdomen treatments Waist-contour refinement Flank programs Professional body-sculpting services Program 2: Thigh and Cellulite Appearance
A lower-body program designed for suitable inner- and outer-thigh concerns. Recommended technologies: Vacuum RF Multipolar RF Inner Ball Roller 80K Cavitation Lipolaser Plates Recommended for: Inner thighs Outer thighs Cellulite-appearance programs Lower-body contouring Program 3: Arms, Back and Hips
A customizable program for smaller or contoured body areas. Recommended technologies: Suitable Cavitation Handle Vacuum Cups Multipolar RF Lipolaser Plates Roller Massage Recommended for: Upper arms Upper and lower back Bra-line areas Hips and flanks Program 4: Face and Neck Firming
A gentler professional program using only applicators and settings approved for facial and neck areas. Recommended technologies: Suitable small RF Handle Appropriate Vacuum Cups Gentle Roller Massage Customized low-intensity settings Recommended for: Facial-contour refinement Jawline treatments Suitable neck areas Professional skin-firming services Complete Accessory Kit for Customized Treatments
The machine includes multiple handles, heads, plates and cups for different treatment areas. The range of applicators allows trained operators to select a suitable size and shape for each treatment zone. New clients should begin with conservative energy, vacuum and temperature settings before the intensity is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
The system supports professional treatments across multiple body and facial zones. Upper-Body Treatments
Upper arms Upper back Lower back Bra-line areas Waist Flanks Lower-Body Treatments
Abdomen Hips Buttocks Inner thighs Outer thighs Legs Face and Neck Treatments
Suitable cheek areas Jawline Lower face Appropriate neck areas Other professionally assessed facial zones Professional Body and Facial Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected technology, handle, cup, plate, energy setting and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, treatment goals, body composition, target areas and contraindications. 2. Technology and Applicator Selection
The appropriate treatment handles, massage heads, vacuum cups and lipolaser plates are selected according to the treatment plan. 3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the cavitation energy, RF level, vacuum pressure, massage intensity and session duration according to client tolerance and professional protocol. 4. Multi-Technology Treatment
The selected technologies are applied in the appropriate sequence. A complete professional session generally lasts approximately 60–90 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the areas are assessed and the client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, warmth, tenderness, bruising, tingling or sensitivity may occur, particularly after vacuum treatments. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments The machine combines multiple contouring technologies with an extensive accessory kit for streamlined professional operation. Key operating advantages include: Ten integrated treatment functions 80K ultrasonic cavitation Vacuum RF and Multipolar RF Eight lipolaser plates Inner Ball Roller massage Seven professional handles Five massage heads Twenty-nine vacuum cups Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system and a comprehensive selection of professional treatment accessories. Standard Equipment
One 10-in-1 Cavitation Vacuum RF main unit Seven professional treatment handles One 80K Cavitation Handle Vacuum RF treatment components Multipolar RF Handles Inner Ball Roller Handle Five massage heads Eight lipolaser plates Twenty-nine vacuum cups Handle and cup connection components Lipolaser cables and accessories Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Treatment-handle setup Cavitation operation RF parameter selection Vacuum-cup selection Lipolaser-plate placement Inner Ball Roller operation Body and facial treatment protocols Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup Control-interface operation Installation of all treatment handles 80K Cavitation operation RF-energy adjustment Vacuum-pressure selection Selection of the 29 vacuum cups Lipolaser-plate placement Inner Ball Roller operation Multi-technology treatment sequencing Client consultation Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital control interface Cavitation-generation components RF and vacuum components Original treatment handles Lipolaser plates Handle and cable connections Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect handle, cup or plate operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of cups, membranes and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional cavitation, RF, vacuum and lipolaser equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Active or suspected blood clots Severe cardiovascular conditions Severe varicose veins Open wounds or active skin infections Severe liver or kidney conditions Uncontrolled diabetes Bleeding disorders Recent surgery Reduced sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Cavitation must not be applied over the head, heart, breasts, kidneys, liver, reproductive organs, bone surfaces or other prohibited areas. RF, vacuum and lipolaser settings must be adjusted according to the treatment area, skin condition and client tolerance. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Professional spas Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Body-contouring studios Wellness centers Trained independent practitioners Qualified aesthetic professionals Businesses expanding their body-contouring services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine? Combine Multiple Technologies
The system combines cavitation, Vacuum RF, Multipolar RF, lipolaser and Inner Ball Roller massage in one professional platform. Access a Complete Treatment Kit
Seven handles, five massage heads, eight lipolaser plates and 29 vacuum cups support a wide range of professional protocols. Treat Multiple Body Areas
The system supports treatments for the abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back, hips, legs and suitable facial and neck areas. Customize Every Session
Multiple technologies, applicator sizes and adjustable settings allow treatments to be adapted to client condition and professional objectives. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and customer support. Frequently Asked Questions
What technologies are included?
The system combines 80K Ultrasonic Cavitation, Vacuum RF, Multipolar RF, lipolaser plates, Inner Ball Roller massage and additional integrated treatment functions. What is 80K cavitation?
The 80K Cavitation Handle delivers ultrasonic energy for professionally planned body-contouring programs on suitable localized areas. Why are 29 vacuum cups included?
Different body and facial areas require different cup sizes and shapes. The selection allows practitioners to choose an appropriate cup for each treatment zone. How many lipolaser plates are included?
The system includes eight lipolaser plates for professionally planned multi-area treatments. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, thighs, upper arms, back, hips, buttocks, legs and selected face or neck areas. How long does a treatment take?
A complete multi-technology session generally lasts approximately 60–90 minutes. The duration depends on the number of areas and technologies selected. How many sessions are recommended?
The treatment course should be customized according to the client’s condition and objectives. Professional programs commonly include multiple sessions with appropriate intervals. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Client sensation varies by technology. Cavitation may produce an audible tone, RF creates warmth, vacuum produces suction and the Roller Handle provides mechanical massage. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, warmth, bruising, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. Is professional training included?
Professional training covers all treatment handles, vacuum cups, lipolaser plates, technology sequencing, safety, cleaning and maintenance. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Multi-Technology Body Contouring to Your Business
The 10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine combines: 80K ultrasonic cavitation Vacuum RF and Multipolar RF Eight lipolaser plates Seven handles, five massage heads and 29 vacuum cups Three-year parts warranty and professional support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its technologies, accessories and professional training. Order Your 10-in-1 Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine and Request Pricing
Accessory Category
Quantity
Recommended Application
Professional Treatment Handles
7
Cavitation, RF, Vacuum RF, Roller and additional functions
Massage Heads
5
Customized mechanical massage
Lipolaser Plates
8
Simultaneous multi-area body programs
Vacuum Cups
29
Different body, face and neck areas
Inner Ball Roller
1 system
Massage and circulation-focused body care
Treatment Area
Applicable Technology
Intended Aesthetic Application
Abdomen
Cavitation, RF and Lipolaser
Body-contour refinement
Waist and flanks
Cavitation and Vacuum RF
Waist-contouring support
Thighs
Vacuum RF and Roller
Cellulite-appearance and texture care
Upper arms
Cavitation, RF or Lipolaser
Targeted body-care programs
Back
Vacuum RF and Lipolaser
Localized contour refinement
Hips and buttocks
RF and Roller
Firming and texture support
Face and jawline
Suitable RF and Vacuum Applicators
Facial-contour programs
Neck
Suitable RF Handle
Professional firming support
Specification
Details
Product Name
10-in-1 80K Cavitation Vacuum RF Machine
Product Type
Professional multifunctional body-contouring system
Primary Technologies
80K Cavitation, Vacuum RF, Multipolar RF, Lipolaser and Roller Massage
Cavitation Frequency
80KHz
Treatment Handles
Seven
Massage Heads
Five
Lipolaser Plates
Eight
Vacuum Cups
Twenty-nine
Treatment Duration
Approximately 60–90 minutes
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waist, thighs, arms, back, hips, legs, face and neck
Control Interface
Professional touchscreen or digital control panel
Power Supply
110V and 220V
Design
Professional wheeled trolley system
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, temperature monitoring, overload protection and adjustable intensity
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and customer assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Receives in 7 days.
Answer a few quick questions and we'll recommend the right Lipo Laser setup for you.
Professional Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System
Twelve Programs and Six Specialized Tips for Customized Skin Care
The WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System is a professional facial platform developed for premium skin-care studios, medical spas, dermatology clinics and luxury beauty centers.
The system combines water-based hydrodermabrasion, booster-serum infusion and facial lymphatic-drainage support. Twelve customizable treatment programs and six interchangeable tips allow practitioners to create personalized protocols for different skin concerns.
Its gesture-control functionality, premium glass components, adjustable treatment settings and compatible booster solutions support efficient professional operation and a premium client experience.
Hydrodermabrasion | Twelve treatment programs | Six specialized tips | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Elite Facial Platform Hydrodermabrasion
The Hydrodermabrasion function combines controlled liquid flow, suction and gentle exfoliation for professional cleansing and hydration. Common applications include: Deep facial cleansing Surface exfoliation Skin hydration Pore-care programs Removal of loosened debris General facial rejuvenation Booster Serum Infusion
The system supports compatible booster serums for customized professional skin-care programs. Common applications include: Hydration treatments Brightening programs Anti-aging skin care Acne-prone skin care Soothing treatments Firming support Facial Lymphatic-Drainage Support
The facial massage and drainage function supports professionally planned treatments for temporary puffiness and facial contour refinement. Common applications include: Facial massage Puffiness-focused treatments Circulation-support programs Facial-contour care Relaxation services Post-cleansing facial protocols Gesture-Control Operation
The smart operating interface includes gesture-control functionality for convenient hands-free adjustment during suitable treatment steps. Common operating applications include: Treatment-program selection Intensity adjustment Improved workflow Reduced contact with controls Efficient treatment transitions Greater focus on the client The appropriate program, treatment tip, booster serum, pressure and session duration should be selected according to the client’s skin condition, sensitivity and professional protocol. Select the Right Facial Program for Each Client
The system provides 12 customizable programs. Practitioners can select an appropriate pathway according to the client’s skin condition and treatment objective. Program 1: Deep Cleansing and Clarity
A cleansing-focused pathway for congested, oily or dull-looking skin. Recommended applications: Deep facial cleansing Surface exfoliation Pore-care programs Removal of excess oil and debris Recommended for: Congested-looking skin Oily-skin programs Dull complexion Professional cleansing facials Program 2: Hydration and Glow
A moisture-focused pathway designed to support refreshed and radiant-looking skin. Recommended applications: Deep hydration Dry-looking skin Dull complexion General skin conditioning Recommended for: Dehydrated-looking skin Hydration facial packages Brightening services Maintenance-oriented treatments Program 3: Anti-Aging and Firming
A rejuvenation pathway for mature-looking skin, fine lines and elasticity concerns. Recommended applications: Fine-line appearance Firming support Mature-looking skin Facial-contour care Recommended for: Professional anti-aging services Mature-skin programs Firming treatments Premium rejuvenation packages Program 4: Sensitive and Soothing Care
A gentler pathway for suitable sensitive-looking or temporarily reactive skin. Recommended applications: Gentle cleansing Skin-comfort treatments Temporary redness Soothing hydration Recommended for: Sensitive-looking skin First-time clients Comfort-focused facials Gentle maintenance programs Twelve Programs for Customized Facial Treatments
The Elite Hydrodermabrasion System provides 12 customizable programs for different professional skin-care objectives. The available settings give trained operators greater flexibility over treatment intensity, pressure, solution selection and treatment duration. New clients should begin with gentler settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually. Six Specialized Treatment Tips
Six interchangeable tips support different facial zones and professional treatment objectives. Cleansing Tips
General facial cleansing Surface exfoliation Pore-care treatments Removal of loosened debris Facial-treatment preparation Hydration Tips
Moisture-focused facials Booster-serum application Dry-looking skin General skin conditioning Brightening protocols Targeted Treatment Tips Nose and T-zone Chin and jawline Cheeks Forehead Other professionally assessed facial zones Professional Facial and Skin-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected program, tip, solution, booster serum and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Facial Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s skin concerns, treatment history, current products, allergies, sensitivity and contraindications. 2. System Preparation
The appropriate treatment tip, cleansing solution and booster serum are selected. Bottles, tubing and treatment components are connected according to the operating manual. 3. Program Selection
The practitioner selects one of the 12 programs and adjusts the available pressure, intensity and treatment-duration settings. 4. Hydrodermabrasion Treatment
The selected tip is moved across the treatment area using the recommended technique. Booster infusion and facial drainage steps are incorporated according to the customized protocol. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the skin is assessed and suitable moisturizer and sunscreen are applied where appropriate. The client receives customized aftercare instructions. A typical professional session lasts approximately 30–50 minutes. Temporary redness, dryness or sensitivity may occur. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines advanced hydrodermabrasion, booster infusion and gesture-control functionality for streamlined professional operation. Key operating advantages include: Twelve customizable treatment programs Six interchangeable treatment tips Four included cleansing solutions Multiple booster-serum options Gesture-control functionality Facial lymphatic-drainage support Premium glass components Modern professional design Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main hydrodermabrasion system, six treatment tips, four cleansing solutions and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One Elite Hydrodermabrasion main unit Six interchangeable treatment tips Hydrodermabrasion handpiece Facial massage and drainage components Solution and booster containers Illuminated waste bottle Required tubing and connection components Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Included Cleansing Solutions
Essence Foam WikBeauty Cleansing Solution Softening, Hydrate and Glow Serum Rejuvenating Extract Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine setup guidance Treatment-tip installation Program-selection guidance Pressure and intensity adjustment Cleansing-solution guidance Booster-serum selection Gesture-control operation Facial-treatment protocols Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Treatment-handpiece operation Tip selection and installation Operation of all 12 programs Pressure and intensity adjustment Cleansing-solution selection Booster-serum selection Gesture-control functionality Facial lymphatic-drainage protocols Client consultation Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Smart control system Gesture-control components Internal pumps Original treatment handpiece Handle and tubing connections Other eligible components supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-tip operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of tips, tubing, filters and consumables Damage caused by incompatible solutions Blockages caused by incorrect cleaning Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional facial equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete skin consultation, allergy review and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Active herpes simplex Open wounds or active skin infections Severe inflammatory acne Severe rosacea aggravated by treatment Recent surgery Recent laser treatment or chemical peel Active skin cancer or suspicious lesions Known allergy to selected solutions or boosters Severe sensitivity Reduced skin sensation Pregnancy without appropriate professional guidance Other contraindications listed in the operating manual A patch test should be performed before using a new booster serum when appropriate. Pressure, exfoliation intensity, booster selection and treatment duration must be adjusted according to the client’s skin condition and tolerance. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Premium skin-care studios Medical spas Dermatology clinics Luxury beauty centers Aesthetic clinics Professional facial specialists Estheticians Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their hydrodermabrasion services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion System? Combine Three Professional Functions
The system combines hydrodermabrasion, booster-serum infusion and facial lymphatic-drainage support in one professional platform. Create Customized Facial Treatments
Twelve programs, six specialized tips and multiple booster-serum options support individualized facial protocols. Improve Professional Workflow
Gesture-control functionality allows practitioners to adjust suitable settings while maintaining focus on the client and treatment process. Expand Your Service Menu
The system supports cleansing, hydration, anti-aging, brightening, acne-care, sensitive-skin and facial-contour programs. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does hydrodermabrasion work?
Hydrodermabrasion combines controlled liquid flow, suction and gentle exfoliation to cleanse the skin and support hydration. How is this system different from basic hydrodermabrasion machines?
The Elite system combines hydrodermabrasion with customizable booster-serum infusion, facial lymphatic-drainage support, 12 treatment programs, six specialized tips and gesture-control functionality. What solutions are included?
The system includes Essence Foam, WikBeauty Cleansing Solution, Softening, Hydrate and Glow Serum and Rejuvenating Extract. What booster options are available?
Available booster categories include brightening, anti-aging, hydration, acne care, soothing and firming. How long does a professional treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 30–50 minutes. Duration depends on the selected program, booster and customized protocol. Can treatments be customized?
Yes. Practitioners can select from 12 programs, six tips and multiple booster options according to the client’s skin condition and goals. Is the system suitable for sensitive skin?
Gentler programs, appropriate tips and suitable soothing products can be selected for some sensitive-skin clients. A professional assessment is still required. What is gesture control?
Gesture control allows practitioners to perform certain program or setting adjustments without directly touching the control interface. Is professional training included?
Remote professional training covers machine setup, program selection, treatment-tip use, booster selection, gesture control, facial protocols, cleaning and safety. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Elite Hydrodermabrasion to Your Facial Business
The WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System combines: Advanced water-based hydrodermabrasion Twelve customizable treatment programs Six specialized treatment tips Booster infusion and lymphatic-drainage support Three-year parts warranty and professional training Contact Wikbeauty to order the Elite system or receive more information about its treatment programs, booster solutions and package contents. Order Your Elite Hydrodermabrasion System and Request Pricing
Program Category
Recommended Application
Cleansing Programs
Surface cleansing, exfoliation and pore-care support
Hydration Programs
Moisture-focused treatments and skin conditioning
Brightening Programs
Dull-looking skin and complexion enhancement
Anti-Aging Programs
Fine-line appearance and firming support
Acne-Care Programs
Suitable congested and acne-prone skin
Sensitive-Skin Programs
Gentle cleansing, hydration and comfort-focused care
Lymphatic Programs
Facial massage and temporary puffiness support
Customized Programs
Treatment-specific settings selected by the practitioner
Skin Concern
Applicable Program
Intended Skin-Care Application
Congested-looking skin
Cleansing program
Deep-cleansing and pore-care support
Dry or dehydrated-looking skin
Hydration program
Moisture-focused facial care
Fine-line appearance
Anti-aging program
Rejuvenation and firming support
Dull-looking complexion
Brightening program
Complexion-enhancement treatments
Uneven-looking tone
Brightening booster program
Tone-refinement support
Acne-prone skin
Acne-care program
Clarifying skin-care services
Sensitive-looking skin
Gentle program
Soothing and comfort-focused care
Temporary facial puffiness
Lymphatic program
Facial massage and contour support
Specification
Details
Product Name
WikBeauty Elite Hydrodermabrasion Facial System
Product Type
Professional hydrodermabrasion and booster-infusion system
Primary Technologies
Hydrodermabrasion, booster infusion and lymphatic-drainage support
Treatment Programs
12 customizable programs
Specialized Tips
Six interchangeable tips
Control System
Smart operating system with gesture control
Included Solutions
Four professional cleansing and treatment solutions
Booster Options
Brightening, anti-aging, hydration, acne care, soothing and firming
Session Duration
Approximately 30–50 minutes
Construction
Premium glass and durable professional materials
Display Features
Illuminated waste bottle and treatment interface
Power Supply
Regional professional AC power configuration
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, pressure regulation and temperature monitoring
Research and Development
More than 15 years of WikBeauty development experience
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and technical assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Receives in 7 days.
$1,399.00
Professional Pressotherapy and Lymphatic Massage System
Sequential Air Compression for Professional Wellness and Recovery Treatments
The Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device is a professional air-compression therapy system developed for beauty salons, wellness centers, physiotherapy clinics, medical spas and body-contouring studios.
Its digital touchscreen provides adjustable pressure, intensity, treatment duration and program selection. Multiple overlapping air chambers inflate and deflate sequentially to create a rhythmic compression massage across the selected treatment areas.
The system can be used as a standalone wellness service or combined with suitable body-contouring and recovery programs.
Sequential air compression | Full-body garment | Adjustable treatment programs | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Applications on One Pressotherapy Platform Lymphatic Drainage
The sequential compression system supports natural lymphatic movement by applying controlled pressure through multiple overlapping air chambers. Common treatment applications include: Lymphatic drainage programs Fluid-movement support Leg-heaviness treatments General wellness sessions Post-treatment drainage support Maintenance-oriented wellness programs Water-Retention Support
The pressotherapy garment applies rhythmic compression to the selected body areas, supporting professional programs for clients concerned about temporary water retention or feelings of heaviness. Common treatment areas include: Legs Thighs Waist Abdomen Arms Full body Circulation and Recovery
Sequential compression may support circulation and recovery-oriented wellness programs. Common applications include: Post-workout recovery Tired-leg treatments Muscle-relaxation programs General circulation support Wellness and recovery sessions Suitable post-procedure support programs Relaxation and Wellness
The rhythmic inflation and deflation of the garment creates a comfortable compression-massage experience. Common applications include: Relaxation treatments Spa wellness programs Body-care packages Stress-reduction services Maintenance treatments Membership-based wellness programs The appropriate pressure, intensity, duration and program should be selected according to the client’s condition, comfort level and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Your Clients
The system supports adjustable programs for different treatment objectives. The appropriate program should be selected following consultation and client assessment. Program 1: Lymphatic Drainage
A structured sequential-compression program designed to support natural lymphatic movement. Recommended applications: General lymphatic-drainage sessions Fluid-movement support Tired or heavy legs Wellness maintenance Recommended for: Wellness centers Beauty salons Body-contouring clinics Businesses adding lymphatic-massage services Program 2: Water-Retention Support
A customizable compression program for clients concerned about temporary water retention and feelings of heaviness. Recommended applications: Leg and thigh treatments Waist and abdomen programs Full-body compression sessions General body-wellness services Recommended for: Spa treatment packages Body-care programs Wellness memberships Clients seeking a lighter, refreshed feeling Program 3: Recovery and Circulation
A rhythmic compression program designed to support circulation and recovery-focused services. Recommended applications: Post-workout recovery Tired-leg programs Muscle-relaxation sessions Suitable professional recovery protocols Recommended for: Physiotherapy clinics Fitness and recovery centers Sports-wellness businesses Medical spas offering recovery services Program 4: Body-Contouring Add-On
A complementary program for suitable clients receiving body-contouring treatments. Recommended applications: Cryolipolysis treatment courses Cavitation programs Radiofrequency body treatments Other suitable contouring services Recommended for: Body-contouring clinics Aesthetic centers Medical spas Businesses creating combination treatment packages Adjustable Compression for Customized Treatments
The Pressotherapy Machine provides adjustable pressure, intensity, duration and program selection. Each setting should be selected according to the treatment area, client comfort and professional objective. The adjustable settings give trained operators greater control over treatment intensity and client comfort. The correct program must be selected following consultation and assessment of the intended treatment areas. Adjustable Treatment Areas
The supplied full-body garment supports targeted and comprehensive compression programs. Leg Treatments
Thighs Lower legs Tired-leg programs Leg-heaviness treatments Recovery-oriented sessions Arm Treatments
Upper arms Lower arms General circulation support Relaxation programs Suitable recovery treatments Waist and Abdomen Treatments
Waist Abdomen General body-wellness programs Water-retention support Body-contouring add-on services Professional Wellness and Recovery Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected pressure, intensity, duration and compression program. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Session Works
1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, treatment goals and suitability. Target areas, pressure level, treatment duration and program are then selected. 2. Garment Preparation
The client is positioned comfortably, and the appropriate garment sections are fitted over the selected treatment areas. The operator confirms that all air-hose connections are secure. 3. Parameter Selection
Pressure, intensity, duration and treatment program are selected according to the client’s comfort, treatment area and professional protocol. 4. Treatment Application
The machine sequentially inflates and deflates the overlapping air chambers, producing rhythmic waves of compression across the selected areas. A typical session lasts approximately 20–45 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After the session, the garment is removed and the client receives appropriate wellness and aftercare guidance. Some clients may return to normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary pressure marks, mild tenderness, increased urination or other short-term responses may occur. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines digital touchscreen control with adjustable air-compression programs for streamlined use in professional settings. Key operating advantages include: Digital touchscreen control Multiple overlapping air chambers Sequential compression technology Adjustable pressure and intensity Customizable treatment duration Preset wellness programs Full-body treatment garment Face-to-face and add-on service flexibility Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, full-body compression garment and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One Pressotherapy control system Full-body compression garment Leg garment sections Arm garment sections Waist and abdomen garment sections Multiple overlapping air chambers Air-hose connection components Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine setup guidance Garment-fitting instructions Air-hose connection guidance Pressure and intensity selection Treatment-program guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Garment fitting Air-hose connections Touchscreen operation Pressure and intensity adjustment Treatment-duration selection Program selection Client positioning Basic treatment protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Air compressor and internal pressure components Original connection hoses Garment connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect pressure or program selection Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of garments, hoses and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional wellness equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Active deep-vein thrombosis or suspected blood clots Severe peripheral vascular disease Uncontrolled cardiovascular conditions Severe heart failure Acute infection or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin conditions Unexplained swelling Severe kidney disease Severe liver disease Untreated hypertension Impaired sensation Recent surgery without appropriate clearance Other contraindications listed in the operating manual The compression garment must be fitted correctly, and the selected pressure must remain comfortable throughout treatment. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Wellness centers Medical spas Physiotherapy clinics Body-contouring studios Fitness and recovery centers Professional massage providers Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their wellness services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose This Pressotherapy System?
Offer a Comfortable Wellness Service
Sequential air compression provides a rhythmic and relaxing treatment experience that can be added to professional wellness menus. Treat Multiple Body Areas
The supplied garment supports treatments for the legs, arms, waist, abdomen and full body. Customize Every Session
Adjustable pressure, intensity, duration and program selection allow treatments to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives. Expand Your Service Menu
The system can support standalone lymphatic-massage services, recovery programs, wellness packages and suitable body-contouring add-ons. Protect Your Investment
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty, professional training, a training certificate and lifetime technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is pressotherapy?
Pressotherapy is a compression-massage treatment that uses multiple air chambers to apply rhythmic pressure to selected body areas. The chambers inflate and deflate sequentially to support lymphatic movement, circulation and relaxation. How does sequential air compression work?
The garment contains overlapping air chambers that inflate and deflate in a controlled sequence. This creates a wave-like compression massage across the selected treatment areas. Which areas can be treated?
The supplied garment supports professional treatments for the legs, thighs, arms, waist, abdomen and full body. How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 20–45 minutes. Treatment time can be adjusted according to the selected program, treatment area and client comfort. How many sessions are recommended?
A typical professional program may include 6–12 sessions. The final number and frequency should be selected according to the client’s condition, objectives and response. Is pressotherapy uncomfortable?
The treatment is designed to provide rhythmic compression. Pressure and intensity can be adjusted according to client comfort. The treatment should not cause pain. Can pressotherapy be combined with other treatments?
It may be offered as a complementary service alongside suitable cryolipolysis, cavitation, radiofrequency and other body-contouring programs following professional assessment. Is there downtime?
Most suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Individual responses may vary. Is training included?
Remote professional training and operating guidance are included. A professional training certificate is provided after completion. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Normal garment wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Professional Pressotherapy to Your Business
The Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device combines: Sequential air-compression technology Adjustable pressure and treatment programs Full-body garment coverage Professional wellness and recovery applications Three-year parts warranty and lifetime support Contact Wikbeauty to order the system or receive more information about its treatment programs, package contents and professional training. Order Your Pressotherapy Machine and Request a Quote
Treatment Program
Recommended Application
Gentle Compression
Relaxation, first-time clients and comfort-focused treatments
Standard Compression
General lymphatic-drainage and wellness programs
Targeted Compression
Selected legs, arms, waist or abdomen treatments
Full-Body Program
Comprehensive wellness and compression-massage sessions
Treatment Area
Applicable Program
Intended Wellness Application
Legs and thighs
Sequential compression
Lymphatic-drainage and tired-leg support
Arms
Targeted compression
General circulation and recovery support
Waist and abdomen
Targeted compression
Body wellness and water-retention support
Full body
Full-body compression
Comprehensive relaxation and wellness
Lower body
Recovery program
Post-workout and muscle-recovery support
Body-contouring areas
Add-on program
Complementary treatment-course support
Tired or heavy legs
Gentle or standard compression
Comfort and relaxation
General wellness
Customized program
Maintenance-oriented compression massage
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Pressotherapy Lymphatic Massage Device
Product Type
Professional air-compression therapy system
Technology
Sequential air-pressure compression
Functions
Lymphatic drainage, wellness, recovery and body-care support
Treatment Areas
Legs, arms, waist, abdomen and full body
Compression System
Multiple overlapping air chambers
Session Duration
Approximately 20–45 minutes
Recommended Protocol
Commonly 6–12 sessions, depending on client assessment
Customization
Adjustable pressure, intensity, duration and program selection
Treatment Application
Fully clothed, non-invasive compression massage
Safety Features
Pressure-limit controls, automatic shut-off and protective sensors
Control Interface
Digital touchscreen with preset wellness programs
Power Supply
110V–240V
Package Contents
Machine, full-body garment, power cable and manual
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Receives in 7 days.
$2,399.00
Professional EMSlim Body-Sculpting System
Smart Fat Reduction, Muscle Toning, and Skin-Firming Technology
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine is a professional, non-invasive system designed to support fat reduction, muscle development, body contouring, and firmer-looking skin within one treatment platform.
The system combines high-intensity focused electromagnetic technology with radiofrequency energy. Electromagnetic pulses stimulate powerful muscle contractions while controlled RF energy heats the underlying tissue, supporting fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments.
Equipped with four ergonomic applicators, an intelligent touchscreen, and 110V/220V compatibility, the machine is suitable for aesthetic clinics, beauty centers, spas, wellness businesses, gyms, fitness studios, and professional body-contouring providers.
HI-EMT and Radiofrequency | Four Applicators | 20–30-Minute Sessions | CE and ISO Certificates | Three-Year Warranty
Three Professional Technologies on One Platform High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
HI-EMT energy penetrates the treatment area and stimulates repeated supramaximal muscle contractions that cannot normally be maintained through voluntary exercise alone. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle toning Buttock muscle stimulation Arm definition Thigh toning Core-strengthening support Improved muscle conditioning Radiofrequency Fat and Tissue Heating
Controlled radiofrequency energy heats the treatment area while the electromagnetic function stimulates the muscles. This thermal action supports fat-reduction treatments and improves the appearance of skin firmness. Common applications include: Localized fat-reduction support Abdominal contouring Waistline shaping Thigh and arm treatments Skin-firming programs Smoother-looking body contours Combined Body-Contouring Technology
The simultaneous use of electromagnetic muscle stimulation and RF energy allows professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin quality during the same treatment program. Common applications include: Muscle building and definition Fat-reduction support Full-body contouring Buttock toning Improved skin firmness Post-weight-loss body shaping Select the Right Program for Each Client Muscle-Toning Program
A focused treatment program designed to stimulate muscle contractions and improve the appearance of strength, firmness, and definition. Recommended applications: Abdomen, buttocks, arms, and thighs. Recommended for: Clients seeking greater muscle definition and improved body tone without intensive conventional exercise during treatment. Fat-Reduction Program
A professional protocol that combines electromagnetic stimulation with controlled RF heating to support the reduction of localized fat deposits. Recommended applications: Abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks. Recommended for: Clients with stubborn body areas that may not respond sufficiently to diet and exercise alone. Complete Body-Sculpting Program
A combined protocol developed to support muscle tone, fat reduction, skin firmness, and improved body contours during one structured treatment course. Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist, buttocks and thighs, or other compatible area combinations. Recommended for: Clients seeking comprehensive body-contouring benefits rather than a single-function treatment. Maintenance and Conditioning Program
A follow-up program designed to support previously achieved muscle tone and body-contouring results. Recommended applications: Previously treated areas requiring periodic muscle stimulation or contour maintenance. Recommended for: Clients who have completed an initial 4–6-session course and want occasional maintenance treatments. Adjustable Electromagnetic and RF Treatment Settings Energy and RF intensity should begin at a comfortable level and be increased gradually according to the client’s response, treatment area, physical condition, and professional operating protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdominal and Waist Areas
The abdomen and waist are common areas for combined muscle-toning and body-contouring treatments. Treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle stimulation Improved core definition Waistline contouring Localized fat-reduction support Firmer-looking abdominal skin Improved midsection shape Arms and Upper-Body Areas
Ergonomic applicators can be positioned on compatible upper-body muscle groups to support toning and definition. Treatment objectives include: Upper-arm toning Biceps and triceps stimulation Improved muscle definition Localized contouring Firmer-looking skin Buttocks and Thigh Areas
The machine supports lower-body programs developed to stimulate the gluteal and thigh muscles while improving body contours. Treatment objectives include: Buttock toning and firming Gluteal muscle stimulation Inner- and outer-thigh contouring Improved lower-body definition Localized fat-reduction support More balanced body proportions Professional Treatment Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s goals, medical history, physical condition, previous treatments, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Body and Muscle Assessment
Identify the treatment area, evaluate muscle condition, and determine the appropriate applicator placement and treatment program. Step 3: Applicator Placement
Position and secure the treatment applicators over the selected muscle groups according to the professional operating protocol. Step 4: Treatment Configuration
Select the treatment time, electromagnetic intensity, and RF level through the intelligent touchscreen. Begin at a comfortable setting and increase the intensity gradually. A typical session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. Step 5: Aftercare Guidance
Remove the applicators, inspect the treated area, and provide suitable hydration, exercise, nutrition, and maintenance recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine combines professional HI-EMT and RF technology with four applicators and an intelligent control system. Key advantages include: Combined muscle stimulation and RF technology Four ergonomic treatment applicators Muscle toning and fat-reduction support Multiple body-treatment applications Approximately 20–30-minute sessions Structured 4–6-session treatment courses 10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen Air and water circulation cooling 110V and 220V compatibility Professional training and after-sales support CE and ISO certificates Three-year professional warranty Technical Specifications The stated muscle-contraction equivalent is a product-performance comparison and should not be interpreted as an exact substitute for conventional exercise. Treatment experiences and outcomes vary according to body composition, muscle condition, lifestyle, settings, treatment frequency, and adherence to the recommended course. What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine 4 × Ergonomic treatment applicators Compatible applicator straps Standard handle connections 1 × Compatible power cable Standard machine accessories 1 × Warranty card Documentation and Training
English user manual Machine setup guide Applicator-placement instructions Treatment-protocol guidance Safety and contraindication information Cleaning and maintenance instructions Professional operating training Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional training and technical guidance to help machine owners and treatment providers operate the EMSlim system safely and confidently. Training and support cover: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Applicator positioning HI-EMT energy adjustment RF setting adjustment Treatment-area selection Client consultation procedures Contraindication screening Treatment-course planning Cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting After-sales technical assistance Ongoing support is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional warranty and after-sales technical support. Warranty Coverage
The warranty provides support for eligible machine components and manufacturing-related faults arising during normal professional operation. Technical assessment may be required before replacement parts or repair assistance are provided. Warranty support includes: Remote technical diagnosis Operating and troubleshooting guidance Support for eligible replacement parts Repair instructions Maintenance recommendations After-sales communication during the warranty period Technical Support Process
Contact Wikbeauty with the machine model and order information. Provide a detailed explanation of the technical issue. Submit clear photos or a short video when requested. Allow the technical team to diagnose the problem. Follow the supplied troubleshooting or repair instructions. Receive eligible replacement-part support when required. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover damage caused by: Incorrect machine operation Unauthorized modification or repair Accidental impact or physical damage Improper voltage or electrical installation Operation without the required cooling conditions Water damage or unsuitable storage Failure to follow maintenance instructions Normal wear of straps, cables, connectors, and other consumable components Shipping or relocation damage occurring after delivery Safety and Contraindications
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment. The system should only be operated by trained professionals following the supplied instructions and applicable local regulations. Treatment may be unsuitable for clients with: Pregnancy or breastfeeding Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Serious cardiovascular conditions Epilepsy or seizure disorders Active cancer or ongoing cancer treatment Severe liver or kidney conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled diabetes Active infection or inflammation Open wounds or damaged skin Recent surgery in the treatment area Severe muscle injuries Abdominal or inguinal hernia Reduced sensation in the treatment area Any medical condition requiring professional clearance Clients with medical conditions or implanted devices should consult a qualified healthcare professional before receiving treatment. Operating Precautions
Complete a consultation before every initial treatment. Inspect the machine, cables, applicators, and cooling system before operation. Position applicators over suitable muscle groups only. Secure each applicator correctly before beginning treatment. Start with a low electromagnetic intensity. Increase energy gradually according to client tolerance. Monitor RF warmth and client comfort throughout the session. Do not place applicators over the head, chest, heart, or injured tissue. Stop treatment if the client experiences pain, dizziness, abnormal discomfort, or skin irritation. Do not exceed the recommended session duration. Maintain sufficient spacing between sessions. Clean and disinfect applicators after every client. Follow the required cooling and maintenance procedures. Use a stable and correctly grounded power source. Maintain appropriate client-treatment records. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Beauty salons Body-contouring centers Medical spas where locally permitted Wellness facilities Gyms and fitness studios Slimming centers Professional muscle-toning providers Entrepreneurs entering the aesthetic-equipment market Users should complete appropriate operating training and comply with local requirements governing electromagnetic, radiofrequency, and body-contouring treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine? 1. Combined HI-EMT and RF Technology
The machine combines powerful muscle stimulation with controlled RF heating, allowing professionals to address muscle tone, localized fat, and skin firmness within one treatment program. 2. Four Ergonomic Applicators
Four treatment applicators provide flexible positioning and support efficient single-area or multi-area protocols. 3. Multiple Body Applications
The system supports professional treatments for the abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks. 4. Intelligent Professional Operation
A 10–12-inch touchscreen, adjustable settings, and air-and-water cooling support convenient use in busy professional environments. 5. Certified Quality and Professional Support
The machine includes CE and ISO certificates, professional training, ongoing technical assistance, and a three-year warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How does the EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine work?
The system combines high-intensity electromagnetic muscle stimulation with radiofrequency energy. HI-EMT stimulates powerful muscle contractions while RF heats the surrounding tissue to support fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments. Q: What is the difference between HI-EMT and RF?
HI-EMT primarily stimulates muscle contractions, while radiofrequency delivers controlled thermal energy to the tissue. Combining them supports muscle toning, body contouring, and skin-firming objectives. Q: What results can the machine support?
The machine supports improved muscle tone, greater body definition, localized fat reduction, firmer-looking skin, and more balanced body contours. Q: Is the treatment invasive?
No. The system works externally and does not require needles, incisions, anesthesia, or surgical procedures. Q: Is the treatment painful?
Clients generally feel strong muscle contractions and controlled warmth. Comfort varies, so intensity should be adjusted gradually and monitored throughout the treatment. Q: How long does one treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 20–30 minutes. Q: How many sessions are recommended?
A starting course generally includes approximately 4–6 sessions, with around two sessions per week when suitable. Q: When can clients expect visible changes?
Some clients may notice improved muscle activation or firmness after several sessions. More developed changes generally appear progressively during and after the treatment course. Individual outcomes vary. Q: Which areas can be treated?
Compatible treatment areas include the abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks. Q: Can multiple areas be treated?
The machine includes four applicators, allowing professionals to create flexible treatment configurations according to the selected protocol and machine controls. Q: Does the machine replace exercise?
EMSlim should complement, not replace, regular physical activity, balanced nutrition, and a healthy lifestyle. Q: Is there any downtime?
Most suitable clients can return to their normal activities after a session. Temporary muscle fatigue or soreness similar to post-exercise sensations may occur. Q: Can the machine help build muscle?
HI-EMT technology stimulates repeated muscle contractions and can support improved muscle tone and conditioning through a structured treatment course. Q: Can it reduce fat?
The combined HI-EMT and RF treatment supports localized fat-reduction programs. Outcomes depend on the client’s body composition, lifestyle, treatment settings, and completed course. Q: Does it tighten the skin?
Controlled RF energy can support collagen-related skin-firming treatments and improve the appearance of skin texture. Q: Is the treatment suitable for everyone?
Every client must complete a consultation and contraindication screening before treatment. Q: Can clients with metal implants receive treatment?
Clients with metal implants in or near the treatment area should not receive treatment without clearance from a qualified healthcare professional. Q: Does the machine support 110V and 220V power?
Yes. The supplied specifications include 110V and 220V dual-voltage compatibility. Q: What certificates are included?
The machine is supplied with CE and ISO certificates. Q: Is professional training included?
Yes. Training includes machine setup, applicator placement, energy adjustment, treatment protocols, safety, cleaning, and maintenance guidance. Q: What warranty is provided?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with after-sales technical support. Add Professional EMSlim Treatments to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine provides clinics, salons, wellness centers, and fitness businesses with a professional solution for muscle toning, fat-reduction support, body contouring, and skin firming. Five key benefits: Combined HI-EMT and radiofrequency technology Four ergonomic applicators Efficient 20–30-minute treatment sessions Multiple body-treatment applications CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, ordering information, training details, and professional support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
HI-EMT Energy
Adjustable electromagnetic intensity
Allows muscle stimulation to be adapted to the treatment area and client tolerance
RF Energy
Adjustable controlled tissue heating
Supports fat-reduction and skin-firming treatments
Treatment Handles
Four ergonomic applicators
Enables flexible single-area or multi-area treatment
Treatment Time
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Supports efficient professional appointment scheduling
Treatment Course
Approximately 4–6 sessions
Provides a structured program for progressive results
Session Frequency
Approximately two sessions per week
Supports consistent muscle stimulation and body contouring
Control Interface
10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen
Provides convenient treatment selection and adjustment
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Supports temperature management during professional operation
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Enables operation in different international markets
Treatment Application
Primary Area
Professional Objective
Abdominal Muscle Toning
Abdomen
Stimulate abdominal muscles and improve definition
Waistline Contouring
Waist and sides
Support a slimmer and more balanced waistline
Buttock Toning
Buttocks
Stimulate gluteal muscles and improve firmness
Thigh Sculpting
Inner and outer thighs
Improve muscle tone and lower-body contours
Arm Definition
Upper arms
Support biceps and triceps conditioning
Localized Fat Reduction
Compatible body areas
Support the reduction of stubborn fat deposits
Skin-Firming Treatment
Abdomen, arms, thighs, and buttocks
Improve the appearance of skin firmness
Muscle Conditioning
Selected muscle groups
Support strength, tone, and muscle activation
Post-Weight-Loss Contouring
Abdomen, thighs, arms, and buttocks
Improve body shape and muscle definition
Maintenance Treatment
Previously treated areas
Help maintain muscle tone and contouring results
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty EMSlim Body Sculpting Machine
Technology
High-Intensity Focused Electromagnetic Technology and Radiofrequency
Treatment Handles
Four ergonomic applicators
Primary Functions
Fat reduction, muscle building, muscle toning, skin firming, and body contouring
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, waistline, arms, thighs, and buttocks
Session Duration
Approximately 20–30 minutes
Recommended Course
Approximately 4–6 sessions
Recommended Frequency
Approximately two sessions per week
Muscle Contractions
Claimed equivalent of up to 30,000 crunches or squats per session
Cooling System
Air and water circulation
Display and Controls
10–12-inch intelligent touchscreen
Power Supply
110V/220V dual compatibility
Certificates
CE and ISO
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
After-Sales Service
Professional training and technical support
Receives in 7 days.
$2,999.00
Professional 3-in-1 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping System
Three Dedicated Handles for Facial Lifting and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping 3-in-1 Machine combines three professional treatment handles within one floor-standing touchscreen system.
The 7D and 8D handles provide focused ultrasound options for facial lifting, skin firming and contour refinement. The Thermal Shaping handle adds deeper body-contouring applications for areas such as the abdomen, waist, arms and thighs.
With seven included cartridges across five distinct treatment depths, the system gives trained operators the flexibility to develop professional face and body treatment protocols from one platform.
Three dedicated handles | Seven cartridges | Face and body applications | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Technologies in One System 7D HIFU Handle
The 7D handle is supplied with three cartridge depths for professional facial and neck treatments: 1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm These cartridges allow trained operators to select an appropriate treatment depth for different facial areas and tissue layers. Common applications include: Facial skin firming Improvement in the appearance of fine lines Brow-area lifting Cheek contouring Jawline definition Neck treatments 8D HIFU Handle
The 8D handle includes 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for focused facial lifting and contour-refinement protocols. It can be incorporated into treatments focused on: Lower-face firming Cheek lifting Jawline contouring Neck tightening Deeper facial treatment protocols The 7D and 8D handles provide different delivery formats. The appropriate handle should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. Thermal Shaping Handle
The Thermal Shaping handle extends the system’s applications from facial treatments to professional body contouring. It includes: 0.8 mm cartridge 13 mm cartridge The deeper cartridge is designed for body areas with suitable subcutaneous tissue, while the shallower cartridge supports more targeted treatment protocols. Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Waist and flanks Upper and lower back Upper arms Thighs Hips Buttocks Seven Cartridges Across Five Treatment Depths
The system includes seven cartridges in total. Some depths appear on both the 7D and 8D handles. The five distinct depths are: 0.8 mm · 1.5 mm · 3.0 mm · 4.5 mm · 13 mm Cartridge selection must be based on client anatomy, tissue thickness, treatment area and professional training. How the System Works
The machine delivers controlled focused energy through the selected handle and cartridge. For facial applications, the 7D and 8D handles direct energy to a defined depth below the skin’s surface. When used correctly, this controlled energy supports the body’s natural tissue-remodeling and collagen-response processes. For body applications, the Thermal Shaping handle provides deeper treatment options for appropriately selected areas with localized tissue concerns. The touchscreen interface allows the operator to select the applicable handle, cartridge and treatment parameters. Individual outcomes vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment settings and biological response. Professional Face and Body Applications Treatment suitability should be confirmed through a complete consultation and contraindication assessment. Build a Focused Treatment Menu Facial Firming Treatments
Use the 7D handle with 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges to develop professional facial protocols at multiple depths. Focused Lifting Treatments
The 8D handle provides an additional treatment format for the cheeks, jawline, lower face and neck. Jawline and Neck Contouring
Both facial handles can support structured protocols for clients concerned with lower-face definition and skin laxity. Professional Body Contouring
The Thermal Shaping handle expands the service menu to include suitable areas of the abdomen, waist, back, arms and thighs. Combination Treatment Planning
Qualified operators may build structured treatment plans using different handles. Each area must be assessed independently, and the technologies should only be combined when appropriate. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The black-and-white floor-standing console combines three treatment technologies in one organized system. Key design features include: Integrated touchscreen control Three dedicated treatment handles Side-mounted handle storage Seven included cartridges Facial and body treatment capabilities 110 V and 230 V power options Stable floor-standing construction Centralized operation from one console At 47 kg, the machine is intended to remain stable during daily professional use while still allowing planned repositioning within a treatment environment. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s treatment goals, medical history, skin condition, tissue thickness and contraindications. 2. Handle Selection
The 7D, 8D or Thermal Shaping handle is selected according to whether the treatment is focused on facial lifting, skin firming or body contouring. 3. Cartridge Selection
The appropriate cartridge depth is selected according to the treatment area and client anatomy. 4. Treatment Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and marked where necessary. Conductive gel or the recommended coupling medium is applied according to the operating instructions. 5. Parameter Selection
The operator adjusts the available settings according to the selected handle, cartridge, treatment area and client tolerance. 6. Controlled Treatment
Energy is delivered using the recommended positioning and technique. The operator monitors the client’s comfort and tissue response throughout the session. 7. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives suitable aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling or sensitivity may occur. Recovery experience varies by technology, treatment intensity and individual response. Technical Specifications
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One 3-in-1 floor-standing touchscreen console One 7D HIFU handle One 8D HIFU handle One Thermal Shaping handle Power cable suitable for the selected voltage Starter conductive gel, where applicable 7D HIFU Cartridges
One 1.5 mm cartridge One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge 8D HIFU Cartridges
One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge Thermal Shaping Cartridges
One 0.8 mm cartridge One 13 mm cartridge Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate RoHS certificate Setup guidance Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping 3-in-1 Machine comes with: CE Certificate RoHS Certificate These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote guidance covering: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Handle installation Cartridge installation and selection Basic treatment-parameter adjustment Facial treatment protocols Body-contouring protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 3-in-1 HIFU and Thermal Shaping Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Original 7D HIFU handle Original 8D HIFU handle Original Thermal Shaping handle Handle connectors Other eligible original machine components Cartridges and other limited-use or consumable components may have separate warranty conditions. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning or storage Damage caused by dropping a handle Normal cartridge depletion Incorrect cartridge installation Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual The order number, machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty support. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before every treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Metallic implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin conditions Conditions affecting normal healing Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area Recent injectable treatments in the area Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Energy must not be applied over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, large blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This 3-in-1 system is suitable for: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Facial-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring centers Qualified independent practitioners Businesses expanding their face and body services The machine is not designed for casual or unsupervised home use. Why Choose This 3-in-1 System?
Three Dedicated Treatment Handles
The 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping technologies each have a dedicated handle for their intended applications. Complete Face and Body Coverage
Offer professional facial lifting, skin firming and body-contouring services from one platform. Multiple Treatment Depths
Seven included cartridges provide five distinct depths ranging from 0.8 mm to 13 mm. Efficient Use of Treatment-Room Space
A single console replaces the need for separate facial HIFU and body-contouring control units. Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the 7D and 8D handles?
The 7D handle includes 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges. The 8D handle includes 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges and provides an additional delivery format for focused lifting protocols. The appropriate handle should be selected according to the treatment area and professional protocol rather than describing one handle simply as stronger than the other. What is the Thermal Shaping handle used for?
The Thermal Shaping handle includes 0.8 mm and 13 mm cartridges for professional body-contouring and firming treatments on appropriately selected areas. How many cartridges are included?
Seven cartridges are included across the three handles. Because the 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm depths are included with both facial handles, the system has five distinct depth options. Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies according to the handle, cartridge, energy level and individual sensitivity. Warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort may occur. Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience varies. Some clients may resume normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. How many treatments will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the technology, treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed outcome should not be promised. What are the dimensions and weight?
The machine measures approximately 110 × 67 × 76 cm and has a net weight of approximately 47 kg. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty 3-in-1 Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Expand Your Face and Body Treatment Services
The Wikbeauty 7D, 8D and Thermal Shaping 3-in-1 Machine combines three dedicated technologies within one professional platform: 7D HIFU for facial firming 8D HIFU for focused lifting protocols Thermal Shaping for body contouring Choose the appropriate voltage and contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, purchasing assistance and delivery information. Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Handle
Included cartridges
Intended application
7D HIFU
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Facial lifting and skin firming
8D HIFU
3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Focused facial and neck treatments
Thermal Shaping
0.8 mm and 13 mm
Targeted and deeper body-contouring protocols
Treatment category
Applicable handle
Common treatment areas
Facial skin firming
7D HIFU
Forehead, cheeks and lower face
Focused facial lifting
8D HIFU
Cheeks, jawline and neck
Fine-line treatments
7D HIFU
Suitable facial areas
Jawline contouring
7D or 8D HIFU
Lower face and jawline
Neck firming
7D or 8D HIFU
Neck and submental area
Body contouring
Thermal Shaping
Abdomen, waist and back
Body firming
Thermal Shaping
Arms, thighs, hips and buttocks
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional 3-in-1 HIFU and Thermal Shaping system
Included technologies
7D HIFU, 8D HIFU and Thermal Shaping
Machine design
Black-and-white floor-standing console
Control interface
Touchscreen
Treatment handles
Three dedicated handles
7D cartridges
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
8D cartridges
3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Thermal Shaping cartridges
0.8 mm and 13 mm
Total included cartridges
Seven
Distinct treatment depths
Five
Machine dimensions
110 × 67 × 76 cm
Net weight
Approximately 47 kg
Power options
110 V or 230 V
Certifications
CE and RoHS certified
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty
Receives in 7 days.
Buy 2+ machines and save up to 15% — get a personalized quote within 24 hours.
$2,999.00
Professional Standing SMAS HIFU System
Blade Tip and Cannon Head Technology for Face and Body Treatments
The Wikbeauty Standing SMAS HIFU Machine is a professional face and body treatment platform combining two Blade Tip handles with one Cannon Head handle.
Seven Blade Tip cartridge depths, ranging from 1.5 mm to 13 mm, support facial skin firming, SMAS-focused lifting and deeper body-contouring protocols. The Cannon Head handle provides precise fixed-point energy delivery through 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges.
Its freestanding trolley design keeps the machine, handles and cables organized while allowing convenient movement within the treatment environment.
Three treatment handles | 1.5–13 mm depth range | Face and body applications | Three-year warranty
Two Complementary HIFU Handle Systems Blade Tip Handles
The machine includes two Blade Tip handles for professional face and body HIFU treatments. Available cartridge depths include: 1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm 6.0 mm 9.0 mm 13.0 mm The broad depth range allows trained operators to select an appropriate cartridge for facial, neck or body applications. Shallower cartridges support facial skin-firming protocols, while the deeper 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges are designed for appropriately selected body areas. Cannon Head Handle
The Cannon Head handle provides fixed-point focused ultrasound delivery for more targeted facial treatments. It includes: 1.5 mm cartridge 3.0 mm cartridge 4.5 mm cartridge This handle is designed for controlled work on suitable areas of the face, jawline and neck where precise energy placement is required. Seven Depth Options from 1.5 mm to 13 mm
Different facial and body areas require different treatment depths. This table provides general application guidance. Cartridge depth must be selected according to client anatomy, tissue thickness, treatment area and professional training. How SMAS HIFU Technology Works
HIFU stands for High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound. The system delivers controlled ultrasound energy to a selected depth below the skin’s surface without creating a surgical incision. When correctly applied, the energy produces focused thermal points within the targeted tissue. This controlled response supports the body’s natural collagen-remodeling process and may be incorporated into professional treatments focused on lifting, firming and contour refinement. HIFU is an ultrasound-based technology and should not be described as a laser treatment. Individual results vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment parameters and biological response. Professional Face and Body Applications
A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment. Precision Face and Body Treatment Planning Facial Skin Firming
The 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm and 3.0 mm cartridges support professional protocols for suitable superficial and mid-depth facial areas. SMAS-Focused Lifting
The 4.5 mm cartridge is commonly incorporated into professional lifting protocols for appropriately selected areas of the lower face and neck. Fixed-Point Facial Treatments
The Cannon Head handle provides controlled energy placement for detailed facial work using 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges. Professional Body Contouring
The deeper 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm Blade Tip cartridges extend treatment possibilities to suitable areas of the abdomen, waist, arms and thighs. Structured Treatment Programs
Qualified operators may create individual face or body treatment plans using the appropriate handle and cartridge. Each area must be assessed separately. Freestanding Trolley Design
The integrated trolley configuration is designed for organized daily operation in a professional treatment environment. Key design advantages include: Stable floor-standing construction Integrated rolling base Three dedicated handle positions Organized cable management Central digital control interface Convenient repositioning between treatment rooms Professional black-and-white appearance Compact all-in-one equipment arrangement The machine weighs approximately 50 kg and should be moved carefully on level indoor surfaces. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, treatment goals, medical history, skin condition and contraindications. 2. Treatment Planning
The operator selects the Blade Tip or Cannon Head handle and chooses a suitable cartridge depth according to the treatment area. 3. Skin Preparation
The skin is cleansed and marked where required. Conductive gel or the recommended ultrasound coupling medium is applied. 4. Parameter Selection
The machine settings are adjusted according to the cartridge depth, treatment area, client condition and recommended protocol. 5. Controlled Energy Delivery
The selected handle is positioned correctly and focused ultrasound energy is delivered using the approved technique. 6. Client Monitoring
The operator monitors client comfort and tissue response throughout the session. Energy settings should be adjusted when necessary. 7. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, tenderness, tingling or numbness may occur. Recovery experience varies between clients. Technical Specifications
Electrical specifications should be confirmed according to the voltage selected for the final order. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One standing SMAS HIFU trolley unit Two Blade Tip handles One Cannon Head handle Power cable suitable for the selected market Starter conductive gel Blade Tip Cartridges
1.5 mm cartridge 2.0 mm cartridge 3.0 mm cartridge 4.5 mm cartridge 6.0 mm cartridge 9.0 mm cartridge 13.0 mm cartridge Cannon Head Cartridges
1.5 mm cartridge 3.0 mm cartridge 4.5 mm cartridge Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate RoHS certificate Installation guidance Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty Standing SMAS HIFU Machine comes with: CE Certificate RoHS Certificate These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote training and operating guidance covering: Machine installation and setup Control-interface operation Blade Tip handle operation Cannon Head handle operation Cartridge installation and selection Basic parameter adjustment Facial and body treatment protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance HIFU safety procedures Basic troubleshooting Training materials support equipment familiarization but do not replace professional anatomy training, qualifications or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Standing SMAS HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital control system Original Blade Tip handles Original Cannon Head handle Handle connectors Other eligible original machine components Cartridges and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning or storage Damage caused by dropping a handle Normal cartridge depletion Incorrect cartridge installation Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual The order number, serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty service. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment. HIFU treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Metallic implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin conditions Conditions affecting normal healing Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area Recent injectable treatments in the area Other contraindications listed in the user manual Focused energy must not be applied over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, large blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained when treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The Standing SMAS HIFU Machine is suitable for: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Facial-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring centers Qualified independent practitioners Businesses expanding their face and body services The system is not designed for casual or unsupervised home use. Why Choose This Standing SMAS HIFU Machine?
Two Complementary Handle Designs
Blade Tip handles provide a wide facial and body depth range, while the Cannon Head handle supports precise fixed-point facial treatments. Complete 1.5–13 mm Depth Range
Seven Blade Tip cartridge depths support professional treatments from superficial facial applications to deeper body-contouring protocols. Three Dedicated Handles
Two Blade Tip handles and one Cannon Head handle provide greater operational flexibility. Face and Body Applications
Offer facial lifting, skin firming, jawline contouring and professional body-contouring services from one platform. Freestanding Professional Design
The integrated trolley keeps the console, handles and cabling organized while allowing convenient repositioning. Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the Blade Tip and Cannon Head handles?
The Blade Tip handles support cartridge depths from 1.5 mm to 13 mm for facial and body applications. The Cannon Head handle uses 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges for precise fixed-point facial treatments. What do the different cartridge depths do?
Shallower cartridges support suitable facial applications. The 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges are used in professional facial and SMAS-focused protocols. The deeper 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges are designed for appropriately selected body areas. Is HIFU a laser treatment?
No. HIFU uses focused ultrasound energy. It is not a laser technology. Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies according to the treatment area, cartridge depth, energy setting and individual sensitivity. Warmth, tingling or temporary discomfort may occur. Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience varies. Some clients may return to normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling or sensitivity may occur. How many treatments will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the area, client condition and professional protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed result should not be promised. How often can treatment be repeated?
Treatment intervals depend on the area treated, energy settings, client response and professional protocol. Sufficient time should be allowed for the tissue response before repeating treatment. What are the machine’s dimensions and weight?
The machine measures approximately 59 × 70 × 152 cm and weighs approximately 50 kg. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty Standing SMAS HIFU Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Expand Your Professional HIFU Services
The Wikbeauty Standing SMAS HIFU Machine combines: Two Blade Tip handles for face and body applications One Cannon Head handle for precise facial treatments Seven Blade Tip cartridge depths from 1.5 mm to 13 mm Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, available voltage options, delivery information and purchasing assistance. Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Cartridge depth
Handle
Intended professional application
1.5 mm
Blade Tip or Cannon Head
Superficial facial protocols
2.0 mm
Blade Tip
Precision facial treatments
3.0 mm
Blade Tip or Cannon Head
Facial and neck applications
4.5 mm
Blade Tip or Cannon Head
Deeper facial and SMAS-focused protocols
6.0 mm
Blade Tip
Shallow body applications
9.0 mm
Blade Tip
Medium-depth body treatments
13.0 mm
Blade Tip
Deeper body-contouring protocols
Treatment category
Common areas
Intended aesthetic application
Upper-face treatments
Forehead and brow area
Firming and lifting protocols
Facial contouring
Cheeks and lower face
Contour refinement
Jawline treatments
Jawline and submental area
Definition and firming
Neck treatments
Neck and suitable décolletage areas
Skin-firming protocols
Body contouring
Abdomen, waist and back
Non-invasive contour refinement
Body firming
Arms, thighs, hips and buttocks
Skin-firming treatments
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional standing SMAS HIFU machine
Technology
High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound
Equipment design
Freestanding trolley with rolling base
Treatment handles
Two Blade Tip handles and one Cannon Head handle
Blade Tip cartridges
1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm, 4.5 mm, 6.0 mm, 9.0 mm and 13.0 mm
Cannon Head cartridges
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Total depth range
1.5–13.0 mm
Machine dimensions
59 × 70 × 152 cm
Net weight
Approximately 50 kg
Certifications
CE and RoHS certified
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty
Receives in 7 days.
From $1,799.00
Professional Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 System
Four Dedicated Technologies for Facial Lifting, Skin Refinement and Body Contouring
The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine combines four professional aesthetic treatment handles within one premium desktop platform.
The system includes a multi-line 4D HIFU handle, a Single-Point HIFU and RF handle, a Skin Knife handle and a Thermal Shaping handle. Together, they support professional services focused on facial lifting, skin firming, contour refinement and non-invasive body treatments.
A 15-inch intelligent touchscreen, multiple cartridge depths and pre-programmed protocols provide trained operators with greater treatment flexibility from one compact system.
Four dedicated handles | 1.5–13 mm depth range | 15-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Technologies in One Machine Multi-Line 4D HIFU Handle
The 4D HIFU handle delivers multiple treatment lines with each activation, supporting more efficient coverage than a conventional single-line HIFU system. It includes facial and body cartridges ranging from 1.5 mm to 9.0 mm. Facial cartridges: 1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Body cartridges: 6.0 mm 9.0 mm The available depths allow trained operators to create protocols for facial skin firming, jawline definition, neck treatments and suitable body areas. Single-Point HIFU and RF Handle
The Single-Point handle combines focused ultrasound and radiofrequency delivery within a targeted treatment format. Available cartridge depths include: 1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm 9.0 mm This handle is designed for controlled energy placement on appropriately selected facial or body areas. The exact HIFU and RF parameters must be selected according to professional training, the treatment area and client suitability. Skin Knife Handle
The Skin Knife handle uses blade-style cartridges designed to distribute energy across broader treatment areas. Available depths include: 1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm It can be incorporated into professional programs focused on skin firming, texture refinement and overall facial rejuvenation. Despite its name, the Skin Knife handle is not a surgical blade and does not cut the skin. Thermal Shaping Handle
The Thermal Shaping handle extends the machine’s applications to professional body-contouring treatments. Available cartridge depths include: 8.0 mm 13.0 mm These deeper cartridges are intended for appropriately selected areas with sufficient tissue depth, including the abdomen, waist, back, arms and thighs. Multiple Delivery Formats for Customized Treatments Each handle provides a different method of energy delivery. Handle and cartridge selection must be based on client anatomy, tissue thickness, treatment goals and professional training. Multi-Line HIFU for Efficient Coverage
The 4D HIFU handle is designed to deliver up to 12 treatment lines per activation, depending on the selected settings and cartridge. Compared with a conventional single-line system, multi-line delivery may provide: More efficient treatment-area coverage More consistent line distribution Reduced repetitive handle repositioning Greater flexibility for larger facial areas More streamlined professional workflows The supplied specifications indicate a cartridge capacity of up to 10,000 shots. Actual capacity depends on the cartridge and operating configuration. Higher line output does not remove the need for correct spacing, safe energy selection and knowledge of facial anatomy. Treatment Depths from 1.5 mm to 13 mm
This table provides general positioning information. The correct depth must be selected according to the treatment area, tissue thickness and approved professional protocol. Professional Face and Body Applications A complete client consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment. How HIFU and RF Technologies Work HIFU stands for High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound. HIFU delivers controlled ultrasound energy to a defined depth below the skin’s surface. When applied correctly, the focused thermal points support the body’s natural tissue-remodeling and collagen-response processes. Radiofrequency uses controlled electrical energy to generate heat within suitable tissue layers. The Single-Point handle combines HIFU and RF delivery for targeted professional protocols. The Thermal Shaping handle uses deeper cartridge options for appropriately selected body areas. Individual outcomes vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment settings and biological response. Build a Complete Professional Service Menu
Multi-Line Facial HIFU
Use the 4D HIFU handle for structured facial lifting and firming treatments with efficient multi-line coverage. Targeted HIFU and RF Treatments
The Single-Point handle supports focused protocols for suitable areas requiring precise energy placement. Skin-Firming and Refinement Services
The Skin Knife handle provides broader energy delivery for professional skin-firming and texture-focused treatments. Body-Contouring Services
The Thermal Shaping handle adds professional body treatments for appropriately selected areas such as the abdomen, waist, arms and thighs. Combination Treatment Plans
Qualified operators may develop treatment plans using more than one handle when appropriate. Compatibility, sequence and treatment intervals must follow professional training and manufacturer protocols. Premium Desktop Design
The gold desktop housing combines four technologies within a compact professional format. Key design features include: Gold professional housing 15-inch intelligent color touchscreen Four dedicated treatment handles Multiple facial and body cartridges Pre-programmed operating protocols Adjustable energy and depth controls Automatic shut-off function AC 110–220 V compatibility Approximately 21 kg net weight The machine should be installed on a stable, level treatment trolley or work surface with sufficient ventilation. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, treatment goals, medical history, skin condition, tissue thickness and contraindications. 2. Handle Selection
The appropriate treatment handle is selected according to whether the protocol focuses on lifting, targeted energy delivery, skin refinement or body contouring. 3. Cartridge Selection
The cartridge depth is selected according to the treatment area and client anatomy. 4. Treatment Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and marked where required. Conductive gel or the recommended coupling material is applied. 5. Parameter Selection
Energy, depth, delivery mode and other available settings are adjusted according to the selected protocol. 6. Controlled Treatment
The operator delivers energy using the correct technique while monitoring client comfort and tissue response. 7. Post-Treatment Care
The area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare instructions. Temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, tenderness, tingling or numbness may occur. Recovery experience varies according to the technology and individual response. Technical Specifications
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 touchscreen console One Multi-Line 4D HIFU handle One Single-Point HIFU and RF handle One Skin Knife handle One Thermal Shaping handle Power cable suitable for the selected market Starter conductive gel Multi-Line 4D HIFU Cartridges
1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm 6.0 mm 9.0 mm Single-Point HIFU and RF Cartridges
1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm 9.0 mm Skin Knife Cartridges
1.5 mm 2.0 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm Thermal Shaping Cartridges
8.0 mm 13.0 mm Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate RoHS certificate Setup guidance Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine comes with: CE Certificate RoHS Certificate These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote training and operating guidance covering: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Handle and cartridge installation Multi-Line HIFU operation Single-Point HIFU and RF operation Skin Knife operation Thermal Shaping operation Basic treatment-parameter selection Facial and body protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting Training materials support equipment familiarization but do not replace anatomy training, professional qualifications or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine is supported by a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects affecting: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Original treatment handles Handle connectors Other eligible original machine components Eligible repair labor during the warranty period Cartridges and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part or repair assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning or storage Damage caused by dropping a handle Normal cartridge depletion Incorrect cartridge installation Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty service. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Metallic implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin disorders Conditions affecting normal healing Recent surgery in the treatment area Recent injectable treatments Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Energy must not be applied over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, large blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the supplied manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained when treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine is suitable for: Beauty salons Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Facial-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring centers Qualified independent practitioners Businesses expanding their face and body services The system is not intended for casual or unsupervised home use. Why Choose the Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine?
Four Dedicated Technologies
Combine multi-line HIFU, targeted HIFU and RF, Skin Knife treatments and Thermal Shaping within one professional platform. Efficient Multi-Line Delivery
The 4D HIFU handle can deliver up to 12 treatment lines per activation for more efficient coverage. Complete Face and Body Depth Range
Cartridge options extend from 1.5 mm for superficial facial applications to 13 mm for deeper body protocols. Premium Desktop Design
The gold housing and 15-inch touchscreen create a refined presentation in a professional treatment room. Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What does “4-in-1” mean?
The system combines four dedicated technologies: Multi-Line 4D HIFU, Single-Point HIFU and RF, Skin Knife and Thermal Shaping. How is 4D HIFU different from conventional single-line HIFU?
The 4D handle can deliver multiple treatment lines per activation. This provides more efficient coverage than repeatedly delivering one line at a time. What does the Single-Point HIFU and RF handle do?
It combines targeted focused ultrasound and radiofrequency delivery for precise professional protocols. Settings and treatment placement must follow the supplied training. Does the Skin Knife cut the skin?
No. “Skin Knife” is the name used for its blade-style treatment cartridge. It is not a surgical blade and does not cut the skin. What is the Thermal Shaping handle used for?
The Thermal Shaping handle includes 8.0 mm and 13.0 mm cartridges for professional body-contouring treatments on appropriately selected areas. Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies according to the technology, area, cartridge depth and energy setting. Warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort may occur. Is there any downtime?
Recovery experience varies. Some clients may return to normal activities shortly after treatment, while temporary redness, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. How many sessions will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the technology, treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed outcome should not be promised. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components and eligible repair labor. Cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Expand Your Face and Body Treatment Services
The Wikbeauty Gold 4D HIFU 4-in-1 Machine brings four complementary treatment technologies into one premium desktop platform: Multi-Line 4D HIFU Single-Point HIFU and RF Skin Knife Thermal Shaping Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, voltage selection, delivery information and purchasing assistance. Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Handle
Delivery format
Primary application
Multi-Line 4D HIFU
Multiple treatment lines per activation
Facial lifting and efficient area coverage
Single-Point HIFU and RF
Targeted point delivery
Precise facial and body protocols
Skin Knife
Broader blade-style delivery
Skin firming and texture refinement
Thermal Shaping
Deeper body-treatment delivery
Professional body contouring
Cartridge depth
Compatible handle
Intended professional application
1.5 mm
4D HIFU, Single-Point, Skin Knife
Superficial facial protocols
2.0 mm
4D HIFU, Skin Knife
Precision facial applications
3.0 mm
4D HIFU, Single-Point, Skin Knife
Facial and neck treatments
4.5 mm
4D HIFU, Single-Point, Skin Knife
Deeper facial and SMAS-focused protocols
6.0 mm
4D HIFU
Shallow body applications
8.0 mm
Thermal Shaping
Medium-depth body treatments
9.0 mm
4D HIFU or Single-Point
Body-contouring protocols
13.0 mm
Thermal Shaping
Deeper body applications
Treatment category
Common areas
Applicable technology
Facial skin firming
Forehead, cheeks and lower face
4D HIFU or Skin Knife
Fine-line treatments
Suitable facial areas
Skin Knife or Single-Point
Jawline contouring
Lower face and jawline
4D HIFU or Single-Point
Neck firming
Neck and submental area
4D HIFU
Skin-texture refinement
Face and suitable neck areas
Skin Knife
Body contouring
Abdomen, waist and back
Thermal Shaping
Body firming
Arms, thighs, hips and buttocks
Thermal Shaping or body HIFU
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional 4-in-1 HIFU and body-contouring system
Machine design
Gold desktop housing
Control interface
15-inch intelligent color touchscreen
Treatment handles
Four
Included technologies
Multi-Line 4D HIFU, Single-Point HIFU and RF, Skin Knife and Thermal Shaping
4D HIFU facial cartridges
1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
4D HIFU body cartridges
6.0 mm and 9.0 mm
Single-Point cartridges
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm, 4.5 mm and 9.0 mm
Skin Knife cartridges
1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Thermal Shaping cartridges
8.0 mm and 13.0 mm
Multi-line output
Up to 12 lines per activation
Cartridge capacity
Up to 10,000 shots, depending on cartridge
Rated power
200 W
Input voltage
AC 110–220 V
Machine dimensions
54 × 45 × 52 cm
Net weight
Approximately 21 kg
Safety functions
Automatic shut-off and adjustable operating limits
Certifications
CE and RoHS certified
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor
Receives in 7 days.
$2,799.00
Professional Vertical 3-in-1 RF Microneedling and Ultrasound System
Three Dedicated Technologies for Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 Gold RF Microneedling and 7D Ultrasound Machine combines three professional aesthetic technologies within one floor-standing system.
It includes a Gold RF Microneedling handle, a 7D Focused Ultrasound handle and a 360° Intimate Ultrasound handle. Together, these technologies support professional treatment programs focused on facial rejuvenation, skin-texture refinement, lifting, body contouring and intimate care.
The vertical design provides organized handle storage and a compact professional footprint for beauty salons, med spas and aesthetic clinics.
Three dedicated technologies | Face, body and intimate care | Adjustable treatment depths | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Technologies in One System Gold RF Microneedling
The Gold RF Microneedling handle combines adjustable microneedle penetration with controlled bipolar radiofrequency energy. The needles enter the skin at a selected depth while RF energy is delivered to the targeted tissue. This controlled process can be incorporated into professional treatments focused on collagen remodeling and skin rejuvenation. The microneedling depth is adjustable from 0.5 mm to 3.5 mm. Common applications include: Improvement in skin texture Appearance of enlarged pores Fine-line treatments Uneven-looking skin tone Acne-scar appearance Facial and body skin firming General skin-rejuvenation programs RF microneedling is a minimally invasive treatment and requires appropriate hygiene, infection-control and aftercare procedures. 7D Focused Ultrasound
The 7D handle delivers focused ultrasound energy at selectable depths for professional face and body treatments. It includes four cartridge depths: 1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm 9.0 mm The shallower cartridges support facial skin-firming and lifting protocols, while the 9.0 mm cartridge is intended for appropriately selected body areas. 360° Intimate Ultrasound
The dedicated Intimate Ultrasound handle delivers focused ultrasound energy in a 360° treatment pattern. It includes: 3.0 mm cartridge 4.5 mm cartridge The handle is designed for specialized professional intimate-care protocols where legally permitted. Intimate treatments must only be performed by appropriately qualified professionals following strict consultation, informed-consent, privacy, hygiene and safety procedures. Four RF Microneedling Tip Options
The RF Microneedling handle includes four tip configurations for different treatment areas and professional protocols. The Nano tip does not penetrate the skin in the same way as the microneedle cartridges. The 10-pin, 25-pin and 64-pin tips contain needles and must follow professional infection-control requirements. Tip selection should be based on the treatment area, client condition and intended protocol. Vacuum-Assisted RF Microneedling Operation The RF Microneedling handle includes a vacuum-assisted contact system designed to support stable placement during treatment. Professional operating features include: Adjustable needle depth from 0.5–3.5 mm Manual operating mode Automatic operating mode Vacuum-assisted skin contact Automatic needle-release function Interchangeable treatment tips Adjustable RF treatment parameters The vacuum feature supports consistent contact but does not replace correct handpiece positioning, professional judgment or client monitoring. Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment. How the Technologies Work Radiofrequency Microneedling
Insulated microneedles penetrate to a controlled depth and deliver RF energy within the selected tissue layer. This creates a controlled treatment response intended to support collagen remodeling and improvement in the appearance of skin texture. Focused Ultrasound
The 7D and Intimate Care handles deliver focused ultrasound energy at a selected depth below the surface. When applied correctly, focused thermal points support the body’s natural tissue-remodeling response without creating a surgical incision. Individual results vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment parameters and biological response. Build a Complete Professional Treatment Menu
Facial Lifting and Firming
The 7D Ultrasound handle supports professional protocols for the face, jawline and neck using 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges. Advanced Skin Rejuvenation
The RF Microneedling handle supports customizable treatments focused on texture, pores, fine lines and general skin quality. Body Firming and Contouring
The 9.0 mm 7D cartridge and suitable RF Microneedling tips expand the treatment menu to appropriately selected body areas. Intimate Wellness Services
The 360° Intimate Ultrasound handle enables qualified operators to add specialized intimate-care services where legally permitted. Combination Treatment Planning
Qualified professionals may develop treatment plans using more than one technology where appropriate. Treatment sequence, intervals and compatibility must follow professional training and manufacturer protocols. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Consultation and Assessment
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, treatment goals, medical history, skin condition and contraindications. Additional informed-consent and privacy procedures are required for intimate treatments. 2. Technology Selection
The RF Microneedling, 7D Ultrasound or Intimate Ultrasound handle is selected according to the intended treatment. 3. Tip or Cartridge Selection
The operator selects the appropriate needle tip, Nano tip or ultrasound cartridge. 4. Treatment Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and prepared according to the selected technology. Appropriate disinfection and sterile supplies are required for microneedling. 5. Parameter Selection
Needle depth, RF energy, ultrasound depth and other available settings are adjusted according to the professional protocol. 6. Controlled Treatment
The treatment is performed using correct positioning and technique. Client comfort and tissue response are monitored throughout the procedure. 7. Post-Treatment Care
The area is cleaned and suitable aftercare instructions are provided. RF microneedling may cause temporary redness, swelling, sensitivity, pinpoint bleeding or mild crusting. Ultrasound treatments may cause temporary redness, tenderness, tingling or swelling. Recovery experience varies between clients. Technical Specifications
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One vertical 3-in-1 control unit One Gold RF Microneedling handle One 7D Focused Ultrasound handle One 360° Intimate Ultrasound handle Power cable suitable for the selected market 7D Ultrasound Cartridges
1.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm 9.0 mm Intimate Ultrasound Cartridges
3.0 mm 4.5 mm RF Microneedling Tips
Nano tip 10-pin tip 25-pin tip 64-pin tip Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate RoHS certificate Installation and setup guidance Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Final tip quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE and RoHS Certified
The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 RF Microneedling and Ultrasound Machine comes with: CE Certificate RoHS Certificate These certificates are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote training and operating guidance covering: Machine installation and setup Digital control operation RF Microneedling handle operation 7D Ultrasound handle operation Intimate Ultrasound handle operation Needle-tip and cartridge installation Basic treatment-parameter selection Hygiene and infection-control procedures Facial, body and intimate-care protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting Training materials support equipment familiarization but do not replace professional qualifications, anatomy training, intimate-care training or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 System is supported by a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, coverage may include eligible manufacturing defects affecting: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital display and control system Original treatment handles Vacuum system Handle connectors Other eligible original components Eligible repair labor during the warranty period Microneedling tips, ultrasound cartridges and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part or repair assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, disinfection or storage Damage caused by dropping a handle Normal depletion of cartridges or tips Reuse of single-use microneedling components Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty service. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation, informed-consent process and contraindication assessment must be completed before every treatment. Depending on the selected technology, treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Metallic implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds Severe skin conditions Conditions affecting normal healing Recent surgery in the treatment area Recent injectable treatments Use of medications that affect healing or bleeding Other contraindications listed in the operating manual RF Microneedling Safety
RF microneedling must be performed using appropriate hygiene and infection-control procedures. Single-use needle tips must not be reused. Intimate-Care Safety
Intimate treatments require appropriate professional training, privacy safeguards, informed consent and strict hygiene controls. Operators must confirm that intimate treatment is permitted within their professional scope and applicable local regulations. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The Vertical 3-in-1 System is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Beauty salons Skin-rejuvenation studios Body-contouring centers Qualified intimate-care providers Appropriately trained independent practitioners The machine is not designed for casual or unsupervised home use. Why Choose This 3-in-1 System?
Three Complementary Technologies
Combine RF Microneedling, 7D Focused Ultrasound and 360° Intimate Ultrasound within one professional platform. Face, Body and Intimate-Care Applications
Develop multiple professional service categories without purchasing three separate control units. Adjustable RF Microneedling Depth
Select a needle depth from 0.5–3.5 mm according to the treatment area and professional protocol. Four Microneedling Tip Options
Nano, 10-pin, 25-pin and 64-pin options support different areas and treatment objectives. Vacuum-Assisted Operation
The vacuum sensor and automatic needle-release function support stable contact and controlled operation. Professional Certifications
The machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Long-Term Equipment Support
Remote training, technical assistance and a three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What does “3-in-1” mean?
The machine combines Gold RF Microneedling, 7D Focused Ultrasound and 360° Intimate Ultrasound. Each technology has its own dedicated treatment handle. Is RF microneedling non-invasive?
No. RF microneedling is minimally invasive because the needles penetrate the skin. Appropriate disinfection, single-use components and post-treatment care are required. What is the difference between the RF Microneedling tips?
The Nano tip supports superficial skin-contact protocols. The 10-pin tip provides precise treatment of smaller areas, while the 25-pin and 64-pin tips provide progressively broader coverage. What do the 7D Ultrasound cartridge depths treat?
The 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges support professional facial and neck protocols. The 9.0 mm cartridge is intended for appropriately selected body areas. What is the Intimate Ultrasound handle used for?
It is designed for specialized professional intimate-care protocols using 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges. It must only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals where legally permitted. Is intimate ultrasound safe?
Safety depends on client selection, operator training, correct parameters, hygiene and adherence to contraindications. It should not be described as risk-free or universally suitable. Is treatment painful?
Client experience varies. RF microneedling may cause discomfort, while ultrasound treatments may produce warmth, tingling or tenderness. Is there any downtime?
Recovery depends on the technology and individual response. RF microneedling may cause temporary redness, swelling or pinpoint crusting. Ultrasound treatments may cause temporary tenderness or swelling. How many sessions will a client need?
Treatment frequency depends on the technology, area, client condition and protocol. A fixed number of sessions or guaranteed outcome should not be promised. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components and eligible repair labor. Tips, cartridges, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded. Does the machine come with CE and RoHS certificates?
Yes. The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 Machine comes with CE and RoHS certificates. Expand Your Face, Body and Intimate-Care Services
The Wikbeauty Vertical 3-in-1 System combines three professional technologies within one floor-standing platform: Gold RF Microneedling 7D Focused Ultrasound 360° Intimate Ultrasound Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, voltage selection, delivery information and purchasing assistance. Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Tip
Intended professional application
Nano tip
Superficial, non-needle skin-contact protocols
10-pin tip
Precise treatment of smaller areas
25-pin tip
Medium-area facial treatments
64-pin tip
Broader face or body coverage
Treatment category
Technology
Common applications
Facial lifting
7D Focused Ultrasound
Face, lower face, jawline and neck
Skin rejuvenation
RF Microneedling
Texture, pores and fine-line appearance
Targeted facial treatments
RF Microneedling
Suitable areas around the mouth and face
Body firming
7D Ultrasound or RF Microneedling
Arms, legs and selected body areas
Body contouring
7D Focused Ultrasound
Appropriately selected areas
Intimate care
360° Intimate Ultrasound
Specialized professional protocols
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional vertical 3-in-1 aesthetic system
Included technologies
Gold RF Microneedling, 7D Focused Ultrasound and 360° Intimate Ultrasound
Machine design
Vertical floor-standing unit
Treatment handles
Three dedicated handles
7D Ultrasound cartridges
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm, 4.5 mm and 9.0 mm
Intimate Ultrasound cartridges
3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
RF Microneedling tips
Nano, 10-pin, 25-pin and 64-pin
Microneedling depth
Adjustable from 0.5–3.5 mm
Needle operating modes
Manual and automatic
Contact system
Vacuum-assisted skin contact
Safety features
Vacuum sensor, automatic needle release and adjustable depth controls
Control system
Digital display with treatment controls and status indicator
Machine dimensions
64 × 62 × 120 cm
Net weight
Approximately 43 kg
Power supply
Regional voltage and plug configurations available
Certifications
CE and RoHS certified
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty covering eligible parts and labor
Receives in 7 days.
$1,999.00
Professional RF Thermal Face-Lifting System
Dual-Handle Technology with Three Treatment Depths
The Wikbeauty Thermal Face Lift Machine is a professional radiofrequency thermal-treatment system developed for facial firming, contour refinement and skin-rejuvenation services.
Two dedicated treatment handles—the Dual-Bo Blade and Cannon Head—provide different energy-delivery formats for detailed facial work and focused treatment applications.
Three interchangeable probes at 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm allow trained operators to select an appropriate treatment depth for different facial areas and professional protocols.
Its compact 19 kg desktop design is suitable for aesthetic clinics, medical spas, beauty salons and qualified independent practitioners.
Two professional handles | Three probe depths | 19 kg desktop design | Three-year warranty
Two Complementary Treatment Handles Dual-Bo Blade Handle
The Dual-Bo Blade handle is designed for controlled energy delivery across appropriate facial areas. Its blade-style treatment format supports professional protocols focused on: Facial skin firming Fine-line appearance Skin-texture refinement Lower-face contouring Suitable areas around the forehead and cheeks Despite its name, the Blade handle is not a surgical instrument and does not cut the skin. Cannon Head Handle
The Cannon Head handle provides focused-point energy placement for areas requiring a more targeted treatment approach. It may be incorporated into professional protocols for: Jawline definition Lower-face firming Neck contour refinement Targeted facial areas Deeper treatment protocols The correct handle should be selected according to the treatment area, tissue condition and operator training. Three Probe Depths for Customized Treatments P1.5 mm — Superficial Facial Protocols
The 1.5 mm probe is intended for controlled treatment of suitable superficial facial areas. Common applications include: Fine-line appearance Skin-texture refinement Appearance of enlarged pores Superficial skin-firming protocols Maintenance treatments Extra caution is required when working near delicate facial structures. Energy must not be applied directly over the eyes or eyelids. P3.0 mm — Mid-Depth Treatment
The 3.0 mm probe supports professional protocols targeting deeper facial tissue than the 1.5 mm option. Common applications include: Facial skin firming Appearance of moderate lines Cheek treatments Lower-face contour refinement General facial rejuvenation P4.5 mm — Deeper Facial Protocols
The 4.5 mm probe is designed for deeper treatment applications on appropriately selected areas. It may be incorporated into protocols focused on: Lower-face lifting Jawline definition Neck firming Contour refinement Suitable areas with sufficient tissue depth Probe depth must always be selected according to facial anatomy, tissue thickness and professional treatment guidelines. Professional Facial Applications Individual outcomes vary according to age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment settings and biological response. How RF Thermal Technology Works
Radiofrequency technology uses controlled electrical energy to generate heat within selected tissue layers. When applied correctly, this controlled thermal response supports collagen remodeling and may improve the appearance of skin firmness, texture and facial contours over time. The operator selects the treatment handle, probe depth and available parameters according to the treatment area and client assessment. The system is intended for aesthetic skin-firming and contour-refinement treatments. It should not be marketed as permanently removing wrinkles, eliminating fat or producing a surgical facelift. Manufacturer-Reported Evaluation Data
The supplied product information lists the following evaluation results: These figures should be described as manufacturer-reported evaluation data. Build a Professional Facial Treatment Menu Full-Face Firming
Combine appropriate probe depths to develop a structured treatment for suitable areas of the forehead, cheeks and lower face. Jawline and Lower-Face Contouring
Use the appropriate handle and deeper probe option for clients concerned with lower-face definition and visible skin laxity. Fine-Line and Texture Treatments
The shallower probe can support protocols focused on suitable superficial areas and overall skin-texture appearance. Neck-Firming Treatments
Develop targeted neck protocols following careful anatomical assessment and contraindication screening. Maintenance Treatments
Suitable clients may receive periodic treatments according to their individual response and professional treatment plan. Compact Professional Desktop Design
At approximately 19 kg, the machine combines professional operation with a relatively compact desktop format. Key design features include: Two dedicated thermal-treatment handles Three interchangeable probe depths Durable ABS machine housing Compact desktop installation Organized professional setup Suitable for dedicated treatment rooms Easier repositioning than a large floor-standing system The machine should be placed on a stable, level treatment trolley or work surface with adequate ventilation. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, skin condition, previous aesthetic procedures and contraindications. 2. Handle Selection
The Dual-Bo Blade or Cannon Head handle is selected according to the intended treatment technique. 3. Probe Selection
The 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm or 4.5 mm probe is selected according to the treatment area and tissue depth. 4. Skin Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and marked where necessary. The recommended coupling medium is applied when required. 5. Parameter Selection
Energy and other available settings are adjusted according to the client’s condition, treatment area and professional protocol. 6. Controlled Treatment
The operator applies the selected handle using correct placement and technique while monitoring client comfort and tissue response. 7. Post-Treatment Care
The treatment area is cleaned and the client receives appropriate aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, warmth, swelling, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. Recovery experience varies between clients. Technical Specifications
Only certifications actually supplied with this exact model should be listed on the final product page. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One Thermal Face Lift desktop console One Dual-Bo Blade handle One Cannon Head handle Power cable suitable for the selected market Starter treatment consumables, where applicable Treatment Probes
One P1.5 mm probe One P3.0 mm probe One P4.5 mm probe Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and setup guidance Treatment-protocol guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate upon completion Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides operating guidance covering: Machine installation and setup Dual-Bo Blade handle operation Cannon Head handle operation Probe installation and selection Basic treatment-parameter adjustment Facial and neck treatment protocols Client consultation and screening Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completing the supplied equipment training. Training supports machine familiarization but does not replace anatomy training, professional qualifications or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Professional Warranty
The Wikbeauty Thermal Face Lift Machine is supported by a three-year limited professional warranty. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Control system Original Dual-Bo Blade handle Original Cannon Head handle Handle connectors Other eligible original components Probes and other limited-use components may have separate warranty conditions. Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part or repair assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning or storage Damage caused by dropping a handle Normal probe depletion or wear Incorrect probe installation Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual Order information, the machine serial number, photographs and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting warranty support. All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This machine is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before every treatment. Treatment may not be appropriate for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Implanted electronic devices Metallic implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Serious cardiovascular conditions Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Active infection or inflammation Open wounds in the treatment area Severe skin conditions Conditions affecting normal healing Recent surgery in the proposed treatment area Recent injectable treatments Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Energy must not be applied directly over the eyes, thyroid, major nerves, large blood vessels, bones or other prohibited anatomical structures. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, professional training requirements and applicable local regulations. Medical guidance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The Thermal Face Lift Machine is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Beauty salons Facial-rejuvenation studios Qualified independent practitioners Businesses expanding their facial treatment services Although the machine has a compact desktop design, it is not intended for casual or unsupervised home use. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Thermal Face Lift Machine?
Two Dedicated Treatment Handles
The Dual-Bo Blade and Cannon Head provide complementary energy-delivery formats for different facial zones. Three Treatment Depths
The 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm probes support customized professional protocols. Face and Neck Applications
Develop treatments for facial firming, jawline definition, texture refinement and suitable neck areas. Manufacturer-Reported Evaluation Data
The supplied assessment figures provide reference information for pore appearance, jawline, brightness, firmness and fine-line outcomes. Compact Desktop Design
The approximately 19 kg system is easier to position than a large floor-standing platform. Professional Training Included
Remote operating guidance and a training certificate are included. Long-Term Equipment Support
Technical assistance and a three-year limited professional warranty support your equipment investment. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the two handles?
The Dual-Bo Blade handle provides a broader blade-style treatment format. The Cannon Head handle supports more focused-point energy delivery for targeted areas. What do the three probe depths do?
The 1.5 mm probe supports superficial facial protocols, the 3.0 mm probe supports mid-depth treatments, and the 4.5 mm probe is intended for deeper facial applications on appropriately selected areas. Are the published percentages clinically verified?
The percentages supplied with the product should be described as manufacturer-reported evaluation data unless a complete independent clinical study is available. Is this machine suitable for the eye area?
Only appropriate areas around the eyes may be treated by a trained professional using the correct probe and parameters. Energy must never be applied directly over the eye or eyelid. How long does a treatment take?
Treatment time depends on the selected area, handle and protocol. A targeted treatment may be shorter than a complete facial session. Are results immediate?
Some clients may notice an early firming response, while collagen-remodeling effects may develop progressively. Timing and results vary between individuals. Is treatment completely painless?
No treatment experience is identical. Clients may feel warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort depending on the area and energy setting. Is there any downtime?
Some clients may resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, warmth, swelling or sensitivity may occur. Is the machine safe for every skin type?
Suitability depends on the client’s skin condition, medical history, treatment area and selected parameters. A consultation and contraindication assessment are required. Is this a home-use machine?
No. This is professional aesthetic equipment intended for trained operators. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Probes, normal wear, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Upgrade Your Professional Facial Treatment Services
The Wikbeauty Thermal Face Lift Machine combines: Dual-Bo Blade treatment technology Cannon Head focused treatment technology Three probe depths from 1.5 mm to 4.5 mm Contact Wikbeauty for current pricing, voltage selection, delivery information and purchasing assistance. Request Pricing and Product Consultation
Treatment category
Common area
Intended aesthetic application
Facial firming
Cheeks and lower face
Firmer-looking facial contours
Fine-line treatments
Forehead and suitable facial areas
Improvement in line appearance
Skin-texture refinement
Cheeks and broader facial areas
Smoother-looking texture
Jawline contouring
Lower face and jawline
Definition and contour refinement
Neck treatments
Suitable neck areas
Firming and profile refinement
Pore-appearance treatments
Appropriate facial areas
Improvement in visible pore appearance
Evaluated concern
Manufacturer-reported improvement
Visible pore appearance
31.54%
Jawline appearance
21.78%
Skin brightness
21.90%
Skin firmness
13.28%
Fine-line appearance
29.63%
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional RF thermal face-lifting system
Technology
Radiofrequency thermal treatment
Treatment handles
Two
Handle types
Dual-Bo Blade and Cannon Head
Probe depths
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Machine design
Portable desktop system
Construction
ABS housing
Machine dimensions
57 × 48 × 43 cm
Net weight
Approximately 19 kg
Intended users
Aesthetic clinics, medical spas, beauty salons and trained practitioners
Warranty
Three-year limited professional warranty
Receives in 7 days.
From $1,349.00
Professional Portable HIFU Facial System
Three Cartridge Depths for Facial Firming and Contour Refinement
The Wikbeauty Portable HIFU Anti-Aging Machine is a professional focused-ultrasound system developed for non-surgical facial and neck treatments.
Three interchangeable cartridge depths—1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm—allow trained operators to create structured protocols for different facial tissue layers and approved treatment areas.
A large 19-inch display provides access to treatment controls, parameter settings and facial-area guidance. Its floor-standing design, metal chassis and approximately 25 kg weight make it more compact than many full-size professional HIFU platforms.
Three cartridge depths | 19-inch display | 180 W rated power | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Cartridge Depths 1.5 mm — Superficial Facial Applications
The 1.5 mm cartridge is intended for suitable superficial facial areas. Potential professional applications include: Superficial skin-firming protocols Fine-line appearance Skin-texture refinement Selected areas of the forehead and cheeks Maintenance-oriented treatments The 1.5 mm cartridge should not be marketed as permanently shrinking pores or removing wrinkles. 3.0 mm — Mid-Depth Facial Applications
The 3.0 mm cartridge supports professionally planned treatment within suitable mid-depth facial and neck tissue. Potential applications include: Facial skin firming Cheek treatments Lower-face contour refinement Suitable neck areas Improvement in the appearance of skin laxity 4.5 mm — Deeper Facial Applications
The 4.5 mm cartridge is designed for appropriately selected deeper facial areas. Potential applications include: Lower-face firming Jawline definition Submental-area protocols Suitable neck treatments Deeper facial contour-refinement programs The 4.5 mm cartridge does not build or tighten muscle like an exercise device. Focused ultrasound creates controlled focal effects within selected tissue. How Focused Ultrasound Works
The machine delivers ultrasound energy to a defined focal depth beneath the skin’s surface. At the focal point, the energy creates controlled thermal and mechanical effects. When delivered correctly, this response may support gradual tissue remodeling and improvement in the appearance of skin firmness. HIFU does not: Remove skin or tissue Produce a surgical facelift Permanently eliminate wrinkles Guarantee double-chin removal Permanently shrink pores Strengthen facial muscles Produce identical results in every client Individual outcomes depend on age, skin condition, tissue thickness, treatment parameters and biological response. Professional Facial Applications The cartridge must be selected according to anatomy, tissue thickness and professional training. A deeper cartridge is not automatically more effective. Large 19-Inch Treatment Display
The system includes a 19-inch HD display designed to provide convenient access to: Treatment-area diagrams Parameter selection Cartridge information Treatment settings Operating status Protocol guidance The display may support facial mapping through diagrams or software guidance. It should not be described as providing real-time visualization of nerves, vessels or tissue layers unless the machine includes a separate diagnostic-ultrasound imaging system. Facial mapping software does not replace anatomical knowledge or professional treatment planning. Professional Treatment Planning Full-Face Firming
Use the appropriate cartridge depths to develop a structured protocol for suitable forehead, cheek and lower-face areas. Jawline and Lower-Face Contouring
The 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges may support professionally planned treatment of appropriate lower-face areas. Submental-Area Treatment
The 4.5 mm cartridge may be used on suitable tissue beneath the chin after confirming adequate tissue depth and excluding prohibited structures. It should not be described as guaranteed double-chin removal. Neck Treatments
Selected neck areas may be treated by a trained operator. Energy must not be delivered over the thyroid, trachea, major blood vessels or other prohibited structures. Fine-Line and Texture Protocols
The shallower cartridge may support improvement in the appearance of suitable superficial concerns. It should not be represented as resurfacing the skin or removing wrinkles. Claims That Should Not Be Guaranteed
The Portable HIFU Machine should not be advertised as providing: Guaranteed immediate lifting Surgical-facelift results Permanent wrinkle removal Nasolabial-fold elimination Guaranteed double-chin removal Permanent pore reduction Zero thermal-damage risk Pain-free treatment for every client Zero downtime Safety for every skin type or medical condition Guaranteed collagen regeneration Household or unsupervised home use Focused ultrasound is professional aesthetic technology with real risks when used incorrectly. Compact Floor-Standing Design
The system combines a large display with a relatively compact vertical housing. Key design characteristics include: 19-inch HD display Metal chassis ABS exterior components Three interchangeable cartridges Professional floor-standing format Approximately 25 kg net weight 180 W rated power Compact dimensions for a professional treatment room The machine should be positioned on a level surface with sufficient clearance and ventilation. Although the system can be moved between treatment rooms, it should not be described as a handheld or consumer-portable device. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s concerns, medical history, previous aesthetic treatments, tissue condition and contraindications. 2. Treatment Mapping
Suitable treatment zones and prohibited anatomical areas are identified and marked. 3. Cartridge Selection
The 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm or 4.5 mm cartridge is selected according to the treatment area and tissue depth. 4. Skin Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed, and an appropriate ultrasound coupling gel is applied. 5. Parameter Selection
Energy, line spacing, treatment pattern and other available settings are selected according to the professional protocol. 6. Test Delivery
A test line or lower-energy application may be performed where required to evaluate client comfort and tissue response. 7. Controlled Treatment
The operator maintains full contact and actively controls the handpiece throughout the treatment. 8. Post-Treatment Care
The area is cleaned and suitable aftercare instructions are provided. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling, numbness or discomfort may occur. Technical Specifications
The 50 Hz specification refers to the electrical power frequency. The ultrasound frequency must be listed separately if provided in the manufacturer’s technical documentation. The introductory draft listed 21 kg, while the technical table listed 25 kg. This final version uses the more formal technical-table value of approximately 25 kg. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One Portable HIFU control system One professional treatment handpiece Power cable suitable for the selected market Required handpiece connections Starter ultrasound coupling gel Treatment Cartridges
One 1.5 mm cartridge One 3.0 mm cartridge One 4.5 mm cartridge Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and setup guidance Cartridge installation training Facial treatment guidance Treatment-area mapping guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Final cartridge quantities and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: Machine installation Display navigation Handpiece operation Cartridge installation Cartridge-depth selection Facial treatment mapping Prohibited anatomical zones Basic parameter selection Coupling-gel application Treatment monitoring Cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not replace anatomy education, professional aesthetic qualifications or licenses required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Professional Warranty
The Wikbeauty Portable HIFU Machine is supported by a three-year limited professional warranty. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Display and control system Original treatment handpiece Handpiece connectors Other eligible original machine components Cartridges are limited-use components and may have separate warranty conditions. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Damage caused by dropping the handpiece Normal cartridge depletion Incorrect cartridge installation Operation without sufficient coupling gel Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
The Portable HIFU Machine is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist assessment for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Active electronic implants Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Open wounds or active infection Severe skin disease in the treatment area Blood-clotting disorders Uncontrolled medical conditions Impaired sensation Recent surgery Recent injectable treatments Facial implants or lifting threads Other contraindications listed in the user manual Prohibited Treatment Areas
Focused ultrasound must not be applied directly over: Eyes or eyelids Thyroid Trachea Major nerves Large blood vessels Bone surfaces Other areas prohibited by the device instructions Incorrect depth, energy or placement can cause thermal or mechanical tissue injury. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The Portable HIFU Machine is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Beauty salons Facial-rejuvenation studios Qualified independent practitioners Appropriately trained healthcare professionals The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Portable HIFU Machine?
Three Essential Facial Depths
The 1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm cartridges support superficial, mid-depth and deeper facial protocols. Large Control Display
The 19-inch interface provides convenient access to treatment settings and facial-area guidance. Compact Professional Format
Its vertical design and approximately 25 kg weight require less space than many larger HIFU platforms. Universal Facial Applications
Develop professional protocols for suitable face, jawline, submental and neck areas. Professional Training
Remote operating guidance and a training certificate are included. Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes a three-year limited professional warranty and remote technical assistance. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the difference between the three cartridges?
The 1.5 mm cartridge supports superficial facial protocols, the 3.0 mm cartridge supports mid-depth treatments, and the 4.5 mm cartridge is intended for deeper applications on suitable facial and neck areas. Can it remove a double chin?
The 4.5 mm cartridge may support contour refinement in an appropriately selected submental area. Guaranteed fat removal or complete double-chin elimination should not be claimed. Can it treat nasolabial folds?
Treatment may improve surrounding skin firmness, but complete elimination of nasolabial folds should not be promised. Can the system be used around the eyes?
Only appropriate areas around the eyes may be treated by a trained operator. Energy must never be applied directly over the eye or eyelid. Are results immediate?
Some clients may notice an early change in firmness. Tissue-remodeling responses may develop progressively over time, and results vary. Is treatment painless?
Client experience varies. Warmth, tingling, tenderness or temporary discomfort may occur. Is there any downtime?
Some clients may continue normal activities shortly afterward, but temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, tingling or numbness may occur. Can this machine be used at home?
No. It is professional HIFU equipment and should only be operated by an appropriately trained person. What does 50 Hz mean?
It is the electrical input frequency, not the frequency of the ultrasound treatment energy. Is training included?
Yes. Remote operating guidance and a training certificate are included. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Cartridge depletion, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Add Professional HIFU Treatments to Your Service Menu
The Wikbeauty Portable HIFU Machine combines: Three professional cartridge depths A 19-inch treatment display Facial-area mapping guidance A compact floor-standing design Professional training and technical support Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local requirements. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Treatment category
Typical area
Suitable cartridge
Superficial facial firming
Forehead and cheeks
1.5 mm
Fine-line appearance
Suitable facial areas
1.5 mm
Cheek contour refinement
Cheeks and mid-face
3.0 mm
Lower-face firming
Lower face
3.0 mm or 4.5 mm
Jawline definition
Jawline
4.5 mm
Submental treatment
Suitable area under the chin
4.5 mm
Neck firming
Approved neck areas
3.0 mm or 4.5 mm
Specification
Details
Product name
Wikbeauty Portable HIFU Anti-Aging Machine
Product type
Professional focused-ultrasound aesthetic system
Technology
High-Intensity Focused Ultrasound
Treatment cartridges
Three
Cartridge depths
1.5 mm, 3.0 mm and 4.5 mm
Display
19-inch HD control display
Facial guidance
Software-based facial-area mapping
Rated power
180 W
Electrical frequency
50 Hz
Construction
Metal chassis with ABS exterior components
Machine dimensions
46 × 25 × 90 cm
Net weight
Approximately 25 kg
Intended treatment areas
Approved areas of the face, jawline, submental region and neck
Intended users
Trained professional operators
Warranty
Three-year limited professional warranty
Support
Professional training and remote technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$2,399.00
Professional 2-in-1 Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation and Roller Massage System
Dual-Function Technology for Muscle Stimulation and Body Massage
The Wikbeauty 2-in-1 Muscle Stimulation and Inner Roller System combines high-intensity electromagnetic muscle stimulation with mechanical roller massage in one professional platform.
Two electromagnetic applicators support controlled muscle-contraction programs, while two Inner Ball Roller handles provide mechanical massage for selected body areas.
A 10.4-inch intelligent touchscreen and four dedicated handles allow trained operators to create separate muscle-stimulation and massage services using one system.
Two technologies | Four treatment handles | 10.4-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Technologies in One System
Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
The system includes two electromagnetic applicators designed to stimulate repeated muscle contractions.
According to the supplied specification, the system provides a peak magnetic-field output of up to 7 Tesla at the applicator.
Potential professional applications include:
-
Abdominal muscle-stimulation programs
-
Buttock muscle-stimulation programs
-
Selected thigh applications
-
Selected arm applications
-
Muscle-tone and firmness programs
-
Professionally supervised body-sculpting services
Magnetic-field strength decreases with distance from the applicator. The 7 T figure should not be interpreted as meaning that 7 T reaches every tissue within the stated 18 cm range.
Inner Ball Roller Massage
The system includes two mechanical Inner Ball Roller handles.
These handles provide controlled rolling massage over selected body areas and may support:
-
Professional body massage
-
Temporary improvement in cellulite appearance
-
Temporary improvement in the appearance of uneven skin texture
-
Relaxation of suitable soft-tissue areas
-
Body-contouring massage programs
-
Pre- or post-treatment massage where appropriate
Mechanical roller massage does not permanently break up cellulite deposits, remove fat or guarantee skin tightening.
Four Dedicated Treatment Handles
The system includes:
-
Two electromagnetic muscle-stimulation applicators
-
Two Inner Ball Roller massage handles
Each handle type has a separate purpose.
| Handle type | Quantity | Primary function |
|---|---|---|
| Electromagnetic applicator | 2 | Controlled muscle stimulation |
| Inner Ball Roller handle | 2 | Mechanical rolling massage |
High-Intensity Electromagnetic Muscle Stimulation
A changing magnetic field can induce electrical activity in nearby nerves and muscles.
This stimulation produces repeated involuntary muscle contractions within the selected area.
Clients may experience:
-
Strong muscle contractions
-
Pulsing or tapping sensations
-
Muscle fatigue
-
Temporary soreness
-
Temporary cramping
Electromagnetic muscle stimulation may support a firmer or more toned appearance, but results differ between individuals and may require ongoing sessions to maintain.
Understanding the 7-Tesla Specification The supplied product information lists: Peak magnetic-field output: up to 7 T Manufacturer-stated maximum reach: up to 18 cm The 7 T figure refers to peak output at or near the treatment applicator. Magnetic-field intensity decreases as distance from the applicator increases. Treatment response depends on: Applicator placement Distance from the applicator Selected energy level Pulse parameters Treatment duration Target anatomy Individual client response Mechanical Inner Roller Massage
The Inner Ball Roller handle applies controlled mechanical pressure and movement to the skin and underlying soft tissue. Mechanical massage may temporarily affect the appearance of cellulite by: Redistributing superficial fluid Providing temporary tissue compression Supporting massage-related circulation Temporarily smoothing the appearance of uneven skin The roller should not be used with excessive pressure or over areas with contraindications. Professional Body Applications The machine should not be used over the head, chest, heart, genitals or other prohibited anatomical areas. Build Two Professional Service Categories Muscle-Tone Programs
Use the electromagnetic applicators for professionally supervised sessions focused on the abdomen, buttocks or other approved muscle groups. Roller Massage Programs
Use the Inner Ball Roller handles for massage and temporary improvement in the appearance of cellulite or uneven skin texture. Combination Body Programs
Qualified operators may include both technologies within a structured body-service plan where appropriate. The two technologies should not automatically be applied simultaneously or described as producing guaranteed combined results. Maintenance Services
Because aesthetic outcomes may be temporary, some clients may choose periodic maintenance sessions based on their individual response. Claims That Should Not Be Made
This system should not be advertised as guaranteeing: Permanent muscle growth Permanent cellulite removal Fat-cell destruction Weight loss Treatment of obesity Tightening of all loose skin Treatment of osteoarthritis Treatment of spinal disorders Accelerated surgical recovery Cure of chronic pain Healing of sports injuries Permanent circulation improvement Results equivalent to exercise Safety for every client How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s goals, medical history, implanted devices, previous surgery and contraindications. 2. Technology Selection
Electromagnetic muscle stimulation, roller massage or a professionally justified sequence is selected. 3. Treatment-Area Assessment
The operator confirms that the area has sufficient healthy tissue and is suitable for the selected handle. 4. Applicator Placement
Electromagnetic applicators are secured over the approved muscle group, or the roller handle is prepared for manual application. 5. Parameter Selection
The operator selects the available intensity, treatment mode and session time according to the client’s condition and tolerance. 6. Controlled Treatment
Client comfort, muscle response, applicator position and skin condition are monitored throughout the session. 7. Post-Treatment Review
The treatment area is assessed, and suitable aftercare guidance is provided. Temporary muscle soreness, cramping, tenderness, redness or bruising may occur. Technical Specifications
Package dimensions should not be presented as the installed machine dimensions unless confirmed separately. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One 2-in-1 touchscreen control system Power cable suitable for the selected market Required handle-connection components Electromagnetic Accessories
Two electromagnetic muscle-stimulation applicators Applicator straps or positioning accessories Flexible support components, where included Roller Massage Accessories
Two Inner Ball Roller handles Handle connection cables Required massage accessories Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and setup guidance Electromagnetic applicator training Roller massage training Client-screening guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: Machine installation Touchscreen navigation Electromagnetic applicator placement Treatment-area selection Intensity adjustment Roller handle operation Appropriate massage pressure Client screening Treatment monitoring Cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not replace professional aesthetic, physiotherapy or medical qualifications required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty 2-in-1 Muscle Stimulation and Roller System is supported by a three-year limited warranty. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main control system Internal electronic components Touchscreen Original electromagnetic applicators Original Inner Ball Roller handles Handle connectors Flexible support components Other eligible original parts Roller surfaces, straps and other consumable or wear components may have separate coverage terms. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Damage caused by dropping a handle Improper cleaning or storage Excessive pressure applied to roller components Normal strap or roller wear Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This is professional aesthetic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. Electromagnetic Treatment Contraindications
Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist clearance for clients with: Pacemakers Implantable cardioverter-defibrillators Neurostimulators Medication pumps Cochlear implants Other active electronic implants Metal implants in or near the treatment field Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Active cancer Recent surgery in the treatment area Significant cardiovascular conditions Uncontrolled seizure disorders Other contraindications listed in the manual Roller Massage Contraindications
Roller massage may be unsuitable over areas with: Open wounds Active infection Significant inflammation Varicose veins Thrombosis or suspected blood clots Bleeding disorders Fragile or damaged skin Recent surgery Unexplained swelling Pressure or vibration urticaria Other contraindications listed in the manual General Precautions Remove phones, watches, cards and metallic objects from the magnetic treatment field. Do not position magnetic applicators over the head, chest, heart or prohibited areas. Monitor strong muscle contractions carefully. Do not leave clients unattended during high-intensity treatment. Clean roller handles between clients. Stop treatment if unusual pain, dizziness, numbness or skin injury occurs. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical clearance should be obtained when suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The 2-in-1 system is suitable for: Aesthetic clinics Medical spas Beauty salons Body-contouring studios Fitness and wellness centers with qualified operators Appropriately trained independent practitioners The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose This 2-in-1 System? Two Complementary Technologies
Combine electromagnetic muscle stimulation and mechanical roller massage within one professional platform. Four Dedicated Handles
Two magnetic applicators and two roller handles support flexible body-treatment workflows. Dual-Area Muscle Stimulation
The two electromagnetic applicators can support treatment of two approved areas according to the selected protocol. Professional Roller Massage
The Inner Ball Roller handles provide controlled mechanical massage and may temporarily improve cellulite appearance. High-Intensity Magnetic Output
The system provides a manufacturer-stated peak output of up to 7 T at the applicator. Universal Voltage
AC 100–240 V compatibility supports installation across multiple international markets. Long-Term Equipment Support
Professional training, remote assistance and a three-year limited warranty are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What makes this a 2-in-1 system?
The machine combines electromagnetic muscle stimulation with mechanical Inner Ball Roller massage. Do the roller handles deliver 7 T magnetic energy?
The supplied information does not clearly establish that the roller handles deliver magnetic energy. The 7 T specification should be applied to the electromagnetic applicators unless the technical documentation states otherwise. Can electromagnetic stimulation build muscle?
Repeated magnetic stimulation can produce muscle contractions and may improve muscle tone or firmness. Results vary. Can both technologies be used during one appointment?
A qualified operator may include both technologies in a structured plan when appropriate. Simultaneous use should only occur if permitted by the operating instructions. Is the treatment painless?
Electromagnetic stimulation causes strong muscle contractions and may lead to soreness or cramping. Roller massage may cause pressure, tenderness or bruising. Can clients remain clothed?
Electromagnetic treatment may be delivered through suitable non-metallic clothing. Roller massage generally requires direct access to the selected body area according to the treatment protocol. Is training included?
Yes. Remote operating guidance and a training certificate are included. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components. Consumables, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded. Expand Your Body-Treatment Services
The Wikbeauty 2-in-1 System combines: Two electromagnetic muscle-stimulation applicators Two Inner Ball Roller massage handles A 10.4-inch intelligent touchscreen Up to 7 T peak magnetic output International voltage compatibility Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local requirements. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Treatment area
Electromagnetic stimulation
Roller massage
Abdomen
Suitable according to protocol
Suitable
Buttocks
Suitable according to protocol
Suitable
Thighs
Suitable according to protocol
Suitable
Upper arms
Selected protocols
Suitable
Flanks
Limited muscle application
Suitable
Back
Only approved muscle areas
Suitable soft-tissue areas
Calves
Selected protocols
Suitable with screening
Specification
Details
Product type
Professional 2-in-1 body-treatment system
Included technologies
Electromagnetic muscle stimulation and mechanical roller massage
Total treatment handles
Four
Electromagnetic applicators
Two
Inner Ball Roller handles
Two
Peak magnetic-field output
Up to 7 T at the applicator
Manufacturer-stated maximum reach
Up to 18 cm
Display
10.4-inch intelligent touchscreen
Input voltage
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Net weight
Approximately 40 kg
Package dimensions
66 × 60 × 49 cm
Typical session setting
Approximately 10–20 minutes per area, protocol dependent
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty
Support
Remote technical support and professional training
Receives in 7 days.
$2,539.00
Professional 3-in-1 TECAR, Acoustic-Wave and EMS System
Three Complementary Physiotherapy Modalities in One Platform
The Smart Tecar Wave integrates TECAR capacitive and resistive energy transfer, acoustic-wave therapy and electrical muscle stimulation within one professional system.
Dedicated handpieces and accessories allow qualified practitioners to use each modality independently according to the patient’s assessment and treatment plan.
The platform includes CET and RET TECAR handles, seven acoustic-wave applicators, EMS electrodes and vacuum-assisted EMS cups, providing flexible options for physiotherapy, sports rehabilitation and professionally supervised musculoskeletal applications.
Three modalities | CET and RET modes | Seven acoustic applicators | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Treatment Modalities TECAR Therapy
TECAR uses radiofrequency energy between 300 and 450 kHz to produce controlled energy transfer within tissue. The system includes two electrode formats: CET — Capacitive Energy Transfer RET — Resistive Energy Transfer TECAR treatment may produce thermal or non-thermal effects depending on the selected settings, treatment technique and tissue characteristics. Acoustic-Wave Therapy
The acoustic-wave module provides adjustable output from 5–200 mJ and a selectable frequency from 1–18 Hz. Seven interchangeable applicators allow the practitioner to adapt surface contact to different professionally assessed treatment areas. Electrical Muscle Stimulation
The EMS module delivers controlled electrical pulses at frequencies from 1–30 Hz. It includes: Reusable EMS electrode pads Adjustable intensity from levels 1–20 Vacuum-assisted EMS cups Multiple accessory sizes Hands-free electrode placement EMS can support selected professional programs involving muscle activation, neuromuscular re-education and rehabilitation. CET and RET TECAR Modes
CET — Capacitive Energy Transfer
CET uses an insulated electrode to transfer energy through tissue. It is generally associated with tissues containing relatively more water and electrolytes, such as: Superficial muscle Fascia Selected soft-tissue areas The system includes CET electrodes in: 20 mm 40 mm 60 mm RET — Resistive Energy Transfer
RET uses an uninsulated electrode and is generally associated with tissues offering greater electrical resistance. It may be incorporated into professional protocols concerning: Tendon regions Ligament areas Joint-adjacent tissue Denser connective tissue Other professionally assessed structures The system includes RET electrodes in: 20 mm 40 mm 60 mm CET should not simply be described as “superficial,” nor RET as directly heating bones. Energy distribution depends on electrode placement, return-electrode positioning, tissue properties and device settings. Additional TECAR Accessories
80 mm Fascia Applicator
The broad 80 mm applicator supports energy delivery over larger professionally selected treatment areas. T-Shaped Handle
The T-shaped handle is designed for broad-area TECAR application and convenient manual movement. Foot-Pad System
The foot-pad accessory provides an additional return-electrode or treatment configuration for appropriate lower-limb protocols. Each accessory must be used according to the supplied operating instructions. Seven Acoustic-Wave Applicators The acoustic-wave module includes seven interchangeable heads. Different applicator sizes may support: Localized soft-tissue areas Tendon-adjacent regions Larger muscle groups Broad surface treatment More targeted contact Applicator shape does not by itself determine treatment depth or establish that the wave is focused. The practitioner must select the applicator according to the diagnosis, anatomy, device instructions and patient tolerance. EMS and Vacuum-Assisted EMS The EMS module delivers electrical stimulation through standard electrode pads or suction-assisted electrode cups. Standard EMS Electrodes
Reusable pads provide controlled electrical stimulation to appropriately selected muscle groups. Vacuum-Assisted EMS Cups
The vacuum cups help maintain electrode contact during hands-free operation. The vacuum function does not provide proven fat reduction or automatically increase muscle growth. It primarily supports electrode positioning and contact. Adjustable EMS Parameters
Intensity levels 1–20 Frequency range 1–30 Hz Multiple electrode formats Hands-free operation Electrical stimulation must not be applied without proper knowledge of electrode placement, current pathways and contraindications. Potential Professional Applications
Subject to the device’s authorized indications and professional assessment, the Smart Tecar Wave may be incorporated into programs concerning: Selected musculoskeletal pain Professionally assessed tendon concerns Muscle tension Neuromuscular re-education Muscle activation Sports rehabilitation Post-injury rehabilitation Range-of-motion programs Selected joint-adjacent soft-tissue conditions Other authorized physiotherapy applications Clinical outcomes vary according to diagnosis, modality, settings and the broader rehabilitation program. Claims That Should Not Be Made Without Specific Authorization
Smart Tecar Wave should not automatically be promoted for: Erectile-dysfunction treatment Pelvic-floor treatment without appropriate accessories and authorization Permanent fat reduction Cellulite elimination Passive muscle building equivalent to exercise Calcium-deposit elimination Bone or cartilage regeneration Guaranteed tissue healing Treatment of every pain condition Superior results from combining all three modalities Unsupervised home use Each medical or aesthetic indication must be supported by the device’s applicable certification, instructions and clinical evidence. How the Three Modalities Work TECAR Energy Transfer
Radiofrequency current passes between the active electrode and return electrode, producing controlled energy transfer through tissue. The operator can adjust technique and parameters to create different treatment effects. Acoustic-Wave Delivery
The acoustic module delivers mechanical pressure pulses through the selected applicator and coupling medium. Its physical behavior depends on the generator design, energy output and applicator. Electrical Muscle Stimulation
EMS applies electrical pulses through surface electrodes to stimulate peripheral nerves and muscle contractions. Treatment effect depends on frequency, intensity, pulse characteristics, electrode placement and individual response. Flexible Multimodality Workflows
Independent TECAR Treatment
Use CET or RET according to the tissue characteristics and professional treatment objective. Independent Acoustic-Wave Treatment
Use the acoustic module with the selected applicator for an appropriately diagnosed condition. Independent EMS Treatment
Use standard electrodes or vacuum-assisted cups for selected neuromuscular applications. Sequential Treatment Planning
Qualified practitioners may include more than one modality in a rehabilitation plan when clinically justified. The modalities should not automatically be used simultaneously or described as producing superior outcomes. Sequence, placement and compatibility must follow the user manual and professional training. How a Professional Session Works 1. Clinical Assessment
The practitioner reviews the patient’s diagnosis, medical history, symptoms, implanted devices, treatment area and contraindications. 2. Modality Selection
TECAR, acoustic-wave therapy or EMS is selected according to the treatment goal. 3. Accessory Selection
The appropriate TECAR electrode, acoustic applicator or EMS electrode is installed. 4. Treatment Preparation
The patient is positioned correctly, and the required coupling medium, return electrode or EMS pads are applied. 5. Parameter Selection
Frequency, intensity, acoustic energy, treatment time and other settings are adjusted according to the professional protocol. 6. Controlled Treatment
The practitioner monitors patient comfort, skin response, muscle contractions and device performance. 7. Documentation and Follow-Up
Settings and patient response are documented, and further treatment is scheduled only when appropriate. Possible temporary responses include warmth, redness, tenderness, muscle fatigue, soreness, bruising or skin irritation. Technical Specifications
Package dimensions should not be described as the machine’s installed dimensions unless confirmed separately. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One Smart Tecar Wave control system Power cable suitable for the selected market Required connection cables Starter treatment consumables, where applicable TECAR Accessories
One RET handle 20 mm RET electrode 40 mm RET electrode 60 mm RET electrode One CET handle 20 mm CET electrode 40 mm CET electrode 60 mm CET electrode 80 mm fascia applicator T-shaped treatment handle Foot-pad system Return electrode and connection components Acoustic-Wave Accessories
One acoustic-wave handpiece Seven interchangeable applicator heads Applicator-removal components Starter coupling gel EMS Accessories
Standard EMS electrode pads Vacuum-assisted EMS cups EMS connection cables Replacement electrode set, where included Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate Applicable ISO documentation Installation guidance Operating instructions for all three modalities Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Final accessory quantities should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE-Certified Professional System
The Smart Tecar Wave comes with: CE Certificate Applicable ISO Documentation These documents are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution. The system must only be marketed and used for the indications covered by its applicable certification and local regulatory status. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: Machine installation TECAR CET and RET operation Electrode and return-plate placement Acoustic-wave handpiece operation Applicator selection EMS electrode placement Vacuum-cup operation Basic parameter adjustment Patient screening Treatment monitoring Cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not replace professional physiotherapy education, medical diagnosis or any license required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Parts Warranty
The Smart Tecar Wave is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and remote after-sales assistance. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main control system Internal electronic components Display and control interface Original TECAR handles Original acoustic-wave handpiece Original EMS and vacuum components Original connectors Other eligible machine parts Electrodes, applicators, pads, seals and other wear components may have separate coverage terms. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Damage caused by dropping a handpiece Improper cleaning or storage Liquid entering electrical components Normal electrode, pad or applicator wear Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Contraindications and Safety Precautions
This system is professional therapeutic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist assessment for patients with: Pacemakers Implantable cardioverter-defibrillators Neurostimulators or medication pumps Other active electronic implants Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Active cancer in the treatment area Open wounds or active infection Significant bleeding disorders Thrombosis Severe cardiovascular conditions Impaired sensation Metal implants in or near the treatment area Recent surgery Other contraindications listed in the user manual TECAR Precautions
The RF current pathway must be planned carefully. Avoid treatment over active implants, prohibited anatomical areas or compromised skin. Acoustic-Wave Precautions
Do not apply acoustic energy over vulnerable organs, lung tissue, major blood vessels, the brain, spinal structures or other prohibited areas. EMS Precautions
Electrode placement must not create a current pathway across the chest or near active implanted devices. Do not apply stimulation over the anterior neck, head or other prohibited areas. This is not an exhaustive list. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
Smart Tecar Wave is suitable for: Physiotherapy clinics Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine practices Orthopedic rehabilitation clinics Licensed multidisciplinary centers Qualified physical therapists Appropriately trained healthcare professionals The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose Smart Tecar Wave?
Three Modalities in One Platform
Combine TECAR, acoustic-wave therapy and EMS without purchasing three separate control systems. CET and RET Operation
Use capacitive and resistive electrode formats for different tissue characteristics and professional protocols. Comprehensive Accessory Package
Multiple TECAR electrodes, seven acoustic applicators and standard or vacuum-assisted EMS options are included. Adjustable Parameters
Select TECAR frequency, acoustic output and EMS intensity according to the treatment plan. Hands-Free EMS Options
Vacuum-assisted cups support stable electrode placement during supervised treatment. Professional Certifications
The machine comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation. Long-Term Equipment Support
Professional training and a three-year limited parts warranty are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What does “3-in-1” mean?
Smart Tecar Wave combines TECAR capacitive and resistive energy transfer, acoustic-wave therapy and electrical muscle stimulation. What is the difference between CET and RET?
CET uses an insulated electrode and is generally associated with water-rich soft tissue. RET uses an uninsulated electrode and is generally associated with tissues offering greater electrical resistance. Can all three modalities be used simultaneously?
They should only be combined or used sequentially when the device instructions and professional treatment plan permit it. Simultaneous use should not be assumed to be safe or superior. Does it provide pelvic-floor therapy?
Surface EMS may support selected professional muscle-stimulation programs, but a specific pelvic-floor indication should not be claimed without appropriate accessories, protocols and authorization. Does TECAR directly heat bones?
No. RET is associated with higher-resistance tissues, but it should not be described as selectively heating or regenerating bone. Is treatment painless?
Patient experience varies. TECAR may create warmth, acoustic-wave treatment can be uncomfortable, and EMS causes muscle contractions or tingling. Is training included?
Yes. Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. This does not replace professional physiotherapy qualifications. Is the machine CE certified?
Yes. Smart Tecar Wave comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation. What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine parts. Consumables, normal wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded. Expand Your Professional Physiotherapy Services
Smart Tecar Wave combines: CET and RET TECAR therapy Adjustable acoustic-wave technology Standard and vacuum-assisted EMS A complete professional accessory package International voltage compatibility Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Specification
Details
Product name
Smart Tecar Wave
Product type
Professional 3-in-1 physiotherapy system
Included modalities
TECAR, acoustic-wave therapy and EMS
TECAR modes
CET and RET
TECAR frequency
300–450 kHz
CET electrode sizes
20 mm, 40 mm and 60 mm
RET electrode sizes
20 mm, 40 mm and 60 mm
Additional TECAR accessories
80 mm fascia applicator, T-shaped handle and foot-pad system
Acoustic-wave output
5–200 mJ
Acoustic-wave frequency
1–18 Hz
Acoustic applicators
Seven
EMS intensity
Levels 1–20
EMS frequency
1–30 Hz
EMS accessories
Standard electrodes and vacuum-assisted cups
Input voltage
AC 110–240 V
Net weight
Approximately 33 kg
Package dimensions
513 × 505 × 455 mm
Certifications
CE certified with applicable ISO documentation
Warranty
Three-year limited parts warranty
Support
Remote after-sales assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$2,299.00
Professional Radial Pressure-Wave and Ultrasound System
Two Physiotherapy Modalities in One Compact Platform
The Wikbeauty Ultrashock combines pneumatic radial pressure-wave technology with 1 MHz therapeutic ultrasound in one professional physiotherapy system.
Twelve interchangeable pressure-wave applicator heads, touchscreen controls and separate treatment modes provide qualified practitioners with flexibility for professionally assessed musculoskeletal and rehabilitation applications.
The compact system integrates two established modalities without requiring two separate control units.
Two modalities | 12 applicator heads | Touchscreen control | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Treatment Modalities Pneumatic Radial Pressure-Wave Therapy The pneumatic handpiece uses compressed air to accelerate a projectile inside the handpiece. The projectile strikes the selected applicator, producing acoustic pressure waves that spread radially into the treatment area. Key features include: Adjustable pressure up to 6 bar Twelve interchangeable applicator heads Applicator sizes from D6 to D25 Flat, targeted-contact and radial applicator designs Touchscreen body-area menus Professional handpiece construction Therapeutic Ultrasound
The ultrasound handpiece operates at 1 MHz and delivers mechanical vibration through an appropriate coupling gel. Therapeutic ultrasound can be used in continuous or pulsed formats where supported by the machine configuration and professional protocol. Potential professional applications may include: Selected soft-tissue rehabilitation Tissue-heating protocols Preparation for stretching or mobility work Other professionally assessed musculoskeletal applications Treatment outcomes depend on intensity, duration, duty cycle, treatment area and individual response. Radial Pressure Waves Versus Focused Shockwaves
Ultrashock uses pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology. An applicator described as a “focus head” provides more localized contact, but it does not turn the pneumatic radial system into a true focused shockwave generator. Twelve Interchangeable Applicator Heads
The system includes twelve pressure-wave applicator heads ranging from D6 to D25. Flat Applicators
Designed to distribute pressure over a relatively broad contact area. Common professional uses may include: Larger muscle groups Broader soft-tissue areas Surface-oriented protocols Targeted-Contact Applicators
Designed to provide more localized contact over an appropriately selected treatment area. These heads do not create a true focused shockwave field. Radial Applicators
Designed to distribute pressure across wider anatomical areas according to the supplied operating protocol. D6–D25 Size Range
Smaller applicators may suit localized areas, while larger applicators provide broader contact. Applicator selection must be based on anatomy, diagnosis, patient tolerance and professional training. Potential Professional Applications Subject to the device’s authorized indications, local regulations and clinical assessment, the Ultrashock may be incorporated into rehabilitation programs concerning: Plantar-fascia pain Achilles-tendon concerns Patellar-tendon concerns Lateral or medial elbow tendinopathy Selected shoulder-tendon conditions Myofascial trigger points Muscle tension Selected sports-related soft-tissue conditions Professionally assessed rehabilitation programs Evidence and protocols vary between conditions. The system should not be represented as treating virtually every pain, joint, tendon or sports injury. Claims That Should Not Be Guaranteed
The Ultrashock should not be promoted as guaranteeing: Calcium-deposit removal New blood-vessel formation Tissue regeneration Accelerated healing Elimination of inflammation Permanent pain relief Faster return to sport Prevention of future injuries Superior outcomes from combining both modalities Suitability for every musculoskeletal condition Clinical outcomes depend on diagnosis, treatment parameters, patient condition and the broader rehabilitation plan. Flexible Dual-Modality Workflow Radial Pressure-Wave Treatment
The practitioner selects an applicator and adjusts the available pressure, frequency and impact settings according to the treatment plan. Therapeutic-Ultrasound Treatment
The 1 MHz ultrasound handpiece is used with an appropriate coupling gel and professionally selected treatment parameters. Sequential Treatment Planning
A qualified practitioner may use both modalities within the same rehabilitation plan when clinically appropriate. The modalities should not automatically be combined on the same area or represented as producing superior results without supporting evidence. Independent Use
Either modality can be used independently according to the patient assessment and treatment objective. How a Professional Session Works 1. Clinical Assessment
The practitioner reviews the patient’s diagnosis, medical history, symptoms, treatment area and contraindications. 2. Modality Selection
Radial pressure-wave therapy, therapeutic ultrasound or a professionally justified sequence is selected. 3. Applicator Preparation
The appropriate pressure-wave head or ultrasound handpiece is inspected and installed. 4. Treatment-Area Preparation
The patient is positioned correctly, and the recommended coupling gel is applied. 5. Parameter Selection
Pressure, frequency, impact count, ultrasound intensity and treatment time are selected according to the professional protocol. 6. Controlled Treatment
The modality is applied while the practitioner monitors comfort, tissue response and device operation. 7. Documentation and Follow-Up
Treatment settings and patient response are documented. Further sessions are scheduled only when clinically appropriate. Temporary discomfort, redness, bruising, swelling or tenderness may occur after pressure-wave treatment. Therapeutic ultrasound risks depend on intensity, duration and treatment location. Technical Specifications
The package dimensions should not be described as the machine’s installed footprint unless the product dimensions are confirmed separately. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One Ultrashock control system One pneumatic radial pressure-wave handpiece One 1 MHz therapeutic-ultrasound handpiece Twelve interchangeable pressure-wave applicators Power cable suitable for the selected market Required connection accessories Starter coupling gel, where applicable Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate Applicable ISO documentation Installation and setup guidance Radial pressure-wave operating guidance Therapeutic-ultrasound operating guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Contraindication-screening guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Professional Training
Touchscreen navigation Pressure-wave handpiece setup Applicator selection Basic parameter adjustment Therapeutic-ultrasound operation Coupling-gel use Treatment monitoring Equipment maintenance Training certificate after completion Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE-Certified Professional System
The Wikbeauty Ultrashock comes with: CE Certificate Applicable ISO Documentation These documents are included with the machine and support its professional positioning and international distribution. The device must be marketed and used only for the indications covered by its applicable certification and local regulatory status. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: System installation Touchscreen operation Pressure-wave handpiece setup Applicator-head installation Basic pressure and impact adjustment Therapeutic-ultrasound operation Patient screening Cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not replace professional physiotherapy education, medical diagnosis or any license required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Parts Warranty
The Ultrashock is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and remote after-sales assistance. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main control system Internal electronic components Touchscreen Original pneumatic handpiece Original ultrasound handpiece Internal compressor components Original connectors Other eligible machine parts Applicators, projectiles, seals, filters and other wear components may have separate warranty terms. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning or storage Damage caused by dropping a handpiece Normal applicator or projectile wear Filter and seal replacement Liquid entering a handpiece Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Maintenance and Operating Care Use the Correct Coupling Medium
Apply the recommended gel during radial pressure-wave and ultrasound treatments. Prevent gel or other liquids from entering the handpieces, connectors or ventilation openings. Inspect Wear Components
Regularly inspect: Applicator heads Projectile and guide components Seals Filters Handpiece connections Ultrasound treatment surface Clean After Use
Clean and disinfect external treatment surfaces according to the supplied instructions. Do not immerse electrical handpieces. Store Correctly
Keep the system in a dry, climate-controlled environment and protect all handpieces from impact. Contraindications and Safety Precautions
The Ultrashock is professional therapeutic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. Treatment may be contraindicated or require additional assessment when the treatment field includes: Active infection Open wounds Malignant tumor A fetus Significant bleeding or coagulation disorder Thrombosis Pacemaker or implanted electronic device Severely impaired sensation Lung tissue or other air-containing organs Brain or spinal structures Active growth plates Other contraindications listed in the user manual High energy should not be applied directly over vulnerable organs, large blood vessels, major nerves or other prohibited areas. This is not an exhaustive list. Appropriate examination, diagnosis and medical clearance are required when treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The Ultrashock is suitable for: Physiotherapy clinics Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine practices Orthopedic rehabilitation facilities Licensed multidisciplinary clinics Qualified physical therapists Appropriately trained healthcare professionals The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose Ultrashock?
Two Modalities in One Platform
Combine radial pressure-wave treatment and 1 MHz therapeutic ultrasound without purchasing two separate control units. Twelve Applicator Heads
Choose from D6–D25 applicator sizes for different professionally assessed areas. Adjustable Pressure
The pneumatic handpiece provides output up to 6 bar. Touchscreen Operation
Body-area menus help streamline equipment setup while leaving final parameter selection to the practitioner. International Voltage Options
Select either a 110 V or 220 V configuration for the intended market. Professional Certifications
The machine comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation. Long-Term Equipment Support
Professional training and a three-year limited parts warranty are included. Frequently Asked Questions
Is Ultrashock a focused shockwave machine?
No. Ultrashock uses pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology. Does the targeted-contact applicator create focused shockwaves?
No. It provides more localized surface contact but does not create the focal field of a true focused shockwave generator. What is the second treatment modality?
The system includes a 1 MHz therapeutic-ultrasound handpiece. Can both modalities be used during one session?
A qualified practitioner may use both modalities when clinically appropriate. They should not automatically be combined for every patient or condition. Can Ultrashock break down calcifications?
Some shockwave technologies are used in selected calcific conditions, but results depend on the technology, diagnosis and protocol. Guaranteed calcification removal should not be claimed for this radial device. Does the machine treat every sports injury?
No. Proper diagnosis and patient selection are required. Different injuries require different rehabilitation approaches. Is treatment painless?
Pressure-wave treatment may produce discomfort, tenderness or temporary bruising. Settings should be adjusted according to clinical needs and patient tolerance. Is training included?
Yes. Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. This does not replace professional physiotherapy qualifications. Is Ultrashock CE approved?
The supplied information confirms CE certification and applicable ISO documentation. What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine parts. Wear components, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. What certifications are included?
The machine comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation. Add Dual-Modality Physiotherapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty Ultrashock combines: Pneumatic radial pressure-wave technology One-megahertz therapeutic ultrasound Twelve interchangeable applicator heads Touchscreen body-area controls A compact professional platform Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Radial pressure waves
Focused shockwaves
Generated by a projectile striking an applicator
Generated through electrohydraulic, electromagnetic or piezoelectric mechanisms
Highest pressure is generally near the applicator surface
Energy is concentrated at a defined focal point
Pressure spreads radially from the applicator
Energy is focused at a selected depth
Commonly described using bar and Hz
Commonly described using energy-flux density
Often used for professionally assessed soft-tissue applications
Used for selected focused clinical applications
Specification
Details
Product name
Ultrashock
Product type
Professional dual-modality physiotherapy system
Included modalities
Pneumatic radial pressure waves and therapeutic ultrasound
Pressure-wave mechanism
Pneumatic ballistic
Maximum pressure
Up to 6 bar
Applicator heads
Twelve interchangeable heads
Applicator sizes
D6–D25
Applicator styles
Flat, targeted-contact and radial
Ultrasound frequency
1 MHz
Control interface
Touchscreen with body-area modes
Rated power
250 W
Voltage options
110 V or 220 V
Package dimensions
58 × 46 × 42 cm
Net weight
Approximately 28 kg
Certifications
CE certified with applicable ISO documentation
Warranty
Three-year limited parts warranty
Support
Remote after-sales support
Receives in 7 days.
$2,829.00
Professional High-Intensity Pulsed Magnetic Therapy System
Dual-Mode Electromagnetic Technology for Physiotherapy and Rehabilitation
The Physio Magneto PM-ST is a professional pulsed electromagnetic therapy system developed for physiotherapy, rehabilitation and appropriately supervised musculoskeletal applications.
With a manufacturer-stated peak magnetic-field strength of 4 Tesla at the applicator coil, two operating modes and a flexible positioning arm, the system supports hands-free treatment workflows in professional clinical environments.
A 10.4-inch touchscreen, integrated water-cooling system and universal voltage compatibility provide convenient operation for qualified physiotherapists and healthcare professionals.
Four-Tesla peak field | Two treatment modes | Hands-free operation | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Magnetic-Therapy Modes ST Mode — High-Frequency Pulsed Operation
ST Mode provides high-frequency pulsed electromagnetic stimulation with an oscillation frequency of up to 130 kHz according to the supplied specification. This mode can be incorporated into professionally supervised programs focused on: Selected musculoskeletal conditions Muscle-stimulation protocols Rehabilitation support Selected joint and soft-tissue applications Other uses authorized for the device MT Mode — 50 Hz Magnetic Operation
MT Mode delivers pulsed magnetic stimulation at 50 Hz. It provides an alternative operating format for protocols involving: Neuromuscular stimulation Muscle relaxation Selected pain-management programs Rehabilitation support Other professionally assessed applications The appropriate mode and parameters must be selected according to the client’s diagnosis, treatment area, contraindications and professional protocol. Understanding the Four-Tesla Specification The supplied technical information lists: Peak magnetic-field strength at the coil: 4 T Magnetic-field strength at 4 cm: 0.4 T Manufacturer-stated maximum reach: up to 18 cm Magnetic-field change rate: 92 T/s The 4 T figure refers to peak output at the applicator coil. Magnetic-field strength decreases with distance from the coil, as reflected by the stated 0.4 T measurement at 4 cm. Treatment effect depends on: Distance from the applicator Applicator positioning Pulse waveform Frequency Exposure duration Tissue anatomy Individual response Non-Contact, Hands-Free Operation The flexible positioning arm holds the treatment applicator over the selected area during operation. This provides several workflow advantages: Consistent applicator placement Reduced need for continuous handpiece movement Convenient positioning around larger joints and muscle groups Minimal preparation compared with contact-based modalities No conductive gel required Treatment through suitable non-metallic clothing Easier integration into professional rehabilitation workflows Hands-free operation does not mean the patient can be left completely unattended. The practitioner should monitor positioning, comfort and system performance throughout treatment. Potential Professional Applications
Subject to the device’s authorized indications, professional diagnosis and applicable local regulations, pulsed magnetic therapy may be incorporated into rehabilitation programs concerning: Selected knee, hip, shoulder or elbow concerns Muscular tension or spasm Selected osteoarthritis-related symptoms Rehabilitation following suitable sports injuries Selected chronic musculoskeletal pain Range-of-motion programs Neuromuscular stimulation Post-treatment rehabilitation under professional supervision Other applications authorized for the system Clinical evidence varies between conditions, devices and protocols. The PM-ST should not be promoted as treating virtually every pain, spinal, tendon, bone or inflammatory condition. Claims That Should Not Be Guaranteed
The Physio Magneto PM-ST should not be advertised as guaranteeing: Cellular re-energization Restoration of cell-membrane potential Increased ATP production Accelerated bone healing Permanent pain relief Elimination of inflammation Reversal of degenerative disease Restoration of damaged spinal tissue Improved circulation in every patient No adverse effects Safety for all age groups or medical conditions These outcomes require evidence for the exact device, parameters, condition and patient population. How Pulsed Magnetic Stimulation Works The applicator coil produces a time-varying magnetic field. A changing magnetic field can induce electrical activity within nearby conductive tissue. Depending on the output, frequency and positioning, this may stimulate peripheral nerves and muscles. The client may experience: Muscle contractions Twitching Tapping or pulsing sensations Tingling Temporary muscle fatigue Post-treatment soreness The technology is non-contact and does not use needles or surgical incisions. However, “non-invasive” does not mean risk-free or suitable for every patient. Build a Professional Rehabilitation Joint-Area Protocols
Position the applicator over an appropriately assessed joint area using the flexible support arm. Large Muscle-Group Stimulation
The high-intensity magnetic field can support professionally controlled stimulation of suitable muscle groups. Neuromuscular Applications
MT Mode provides a lower-frequency option for selected neuromuscular protocols. Rehabilitation Programs
The system may be incorporated into a broader rehabilitation plan that includes exercise, manual therapy and other evidence-based interventions. Monitoring and Reassessment
Treatment progress should be evaluated using appropriate clinical outcome measures rather than relying only on subjective improvement claims. How a Professional Session Works 1. Clinical Assessment
The practitioner reviews the patient’s diagnosis, symptoms, medical history, implanted devices and contraindications. 2. Treatment Planning
The practitioner selects ST Mode or MT Mode according to the clinical objective and device instructions. 3. Applicator Positioning
The patient is positioned comfortably and all metallic objects are removed from the treatment field. The applicator is secured using the adjustable arm. 4. Parameter Selection
Frequency, intensity, treatment time and other available settings are selected according to the professional protocol. 5. Controlled Treatment
Treatment begins while the practitioner monitors patient comfort, muscle response and applicator position. 6. Post-Treatment Assessment
The practitioner checks for discomfort, muscle fatigue, soreness or other responses and documents the session. 7. Follow-Up
Further sessions are scheduled only when appropriate based on the patient’s response and treatment plan. A universal 10–20-minute protocol or fixed 8–12-session course should not be promised for every condition. Technical Specifications
Specifications may be updated according to the final production configuration. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One Physio Magneto PM-ST control system One magnetic-field treatment applicator One flexible positioning arm Integrated water-cooling system Power cable suitable for the selected market Required connection accessories Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and setup guidance ST Mode operating guidance MT Mode operating guidance Patient-screening guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Water-cooling maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: Machine installation Touchscreen navigation Applicator positioning ST and MT Mode selection Basic parameter adjustment Patient screening Removal of metallic objects Treatment monitoring Water-cooling maintenance Cleaning and storage Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not replace professional physiotherapy education, medical diagnosis or any license required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Parts Warranty
The Physio Magneto PM-ST is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical support. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen Original treatment applicator Flexible positioning arm Water-cooling components Original connectors Other eligible machine parts Consumable, wear and maintenance components may have separate coverage terms. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote technical assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper water-cooling maintenance Use of unsuitable cooling liquid Damage caused by dropping the applicator Normal wear of moving or support components Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Contraindications and Safety Precautions High-intensity pulsed magnetic fields can interact with implanted devices and metallic objects. The system must not be used without appropriate professional assessment. Treatment may be contraindicated or require specialist clearance in patients with: Pacemakers Implantable cardioverter-defibrillators Neurostimulators Medication pumps Cochlear implants Other active electronic implants Ferromagnetic implants or metal in the treatment field Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Active cancer in the treatment area Recent bleeding or significant bleeding disorders Uncontrolled seizure disorders Severe cardiovascular conditions Impaired sensation Other contraindications listed in the user manual Additional Operating Precautions
Remove phones, watches, keys, cards and other metallic or electronic objects from the treatment field. Do not position the applicator over the head, eyes or other prohibited areas unless specifically authorized. Confirm implant compatibility before treatment. Monitor the patient for excessive contractions, discomfort, dizziness or other adverse responses. Ensure the applicator is securely positioned before starting. Maintain the water-cooling system according to the supplied instructions. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Medical clearance should be obtained whenever treatment suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
The Physio Magneto PM-ST is suitable for: Physiotherapy clinics Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine practices Orthopedic rehabilitation clinics Pain-management practices Qualified physical therapists Appropriately trained healthcare professionals The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose Physio Magneto PM-ST?
High-Intensity Magnetic Output
The system provides a manufacturer-stated peak field strength of up to 4 T at the applicator coil. Two Operating Modes
Choose between high-frequency ST Mode and 50 Hz MT Mode according to the professional protocol. Hands-Free Positioning
The flexible arm supports stable applicator placement during supervised treatment. Non-Contact Operation
Treatment can be delivered through suitable non-metallic clothing without conductive gel. Integrated Water Cooling
The 2.5 L cooling system supports controlled equipment temperature during professional operation. Universal Voltage
AC 100–240 V compatibility supports installation across multiple international markets. Long-Term Equipment Support
Professional training, a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical assistance are included. Frequently Asked Questions
What is Physio Magneto PM-ST?
It is a professional high-intensity pulsed magnetic therapy system with two operating modes and a peak field strength of up to 4 T at the applicator coil. Is PM-ST the same as conventional low-intensity PEMF?
No. PM-ST uses substantially higher peak magnetic output than many low-intensity consumer PEMF products. Research on one type of electromagnetic device cannot automatically validate another. What is the difference between ST Mode and MT Mode?
ST Mode provides higher-frequency pulsed operation up to the machine’s specified maximum. MT Mode operates at 50 Hz for a different stimulation format. Can patients remain clothed?
The magnetic field can pass through suitable non-metallic clothing. Metallic items, electronic devices and unsuitable garments must be removed from the treatment field. Is treatment painless?
Patients may experience contractions, twitching, tingling or tapping sensations. Intensity should be adjusted according to professional judgment and patient tolerance. Is there any downtime?
Many patients may continue normal activities after treatment, but temporary muscle fatigue, soreness or cramping may occur. Is it safe for patients with pacemakers?
No. High-intensity pulsed magnetic fields may interfere with pacemakers and other active implants. These patients should not be treated unless expressly permitted by the device instructions and relevant medical specialists. How many sessions are required?
There is no universal treatment course for every condition. Frequency and session number must be determined by a qualified professional. What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine parts. Accidental damage, misuse, improper cooling maintenance and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Add High-Intensity Magnetic Therapy to Your Practice
The Physio Magneto PM-ST combines: Up to 4 T peak magnetic output ST and MT operating modes Hands-free applicator positioning A 10.4-inch touchscreen Integrated water cooling Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Specification
Details
Product name
Physio Magneto PM-ST
Product type
Professional pulsed magnetic therapy system
Technology
High-intensity pulsed electromagnetic stimulation
Operating modes
ST Mode and MT Mode
Peak field strength at coil
Up to 4 T
Field strength at 4 cm
Approximately 0.4 T
Manufacturer-stated maximum reach
Up to 18 cm
Maximum oscillation frequency
Up to 130 kHz
MT Mode frequency
50 Hz
Magnetic-field change rate
92 T/s
Therapeutic-intensity reference
Manufacturer-stated ≥10 mT
Display
10.4-inch touchscreen
Applicator support
Flexible hands-free positioning arm
Cooling system
Integrated water cooling
Water-cooling capacity
2.5 L
Input voltage
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Package dimensions
66 × 60 × 49 cm
Net weight
Approximately 40 kg
Warranty
Three-year limited parts warranty
Technical support
Lifetime remote support
Receives in 7 days.
$2,449.00
Professional Radial Pressure-Wave and Therapeutic Ultrasound System
Dual-Modality Physiotherapy Technology in a Protective Aluminium Case
The Ultrashock Master combines pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology with 1 MHz therapeutic ultrasound in one professional rehabilitation system.
Its 10.4-inch touchscreen provides separate body-area menus for both modalities. Twelve interchangeable pressure-wave applicator heads, adjustable operating parameters and continuous or pulsed ultrasound modes support customized physiotherapy and rehabilitation workflows.
The complete system is supplied in a protective aluminium case for organized storage and transportation between appropriate professional locations.
Two treatment modalities | 12 applicator heads | 10.4-inch touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Treatment Modalities Pneumatic Radial Pressure-Wave Therapy
The radial pressure-wave handpiece uses compressed air to accelerate a projectile inside the handpiece. The projectile strikes the applicator, generating acoustic pressure waves that spread radially into the tissue. Adjustable operating parameters include: Pressure from 1–6 bar Frequency from 1–21 Hz Preload from 800–3,000 impacts Twelve interchangeable applicator heads Ten pre-programmed body-area menus The system produces radial pressure waves rather than focused extracorporeal shockwaves. These technologies have different physical characteristics and should not be treated as interchangeable. Therapeutic Ultrasound
The second modality delivers therapeutic ultrasound at a frequency of 1 MHz. The system supports: Adjustable intensity from 0.2–3.0 W/cm² Continuous mode Pulsed modes from 1–10 Hz Adjustable treatment time from 1–60 minutes Ten ultrasound body-area menus Operation with appropriate ultrasound coupling gel Therapeutic ultrasound parameters must be selected by a qualified professional according to the treatment area, clinical objective and patient assessment. Radial Pressure Waves Versus Focused Shockwaves
Ultrashock Master uses pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology. The machine should be marketed according to its actual radial pressure-wave technology, not as a focused shockwave device. Professional Musculoskeletal Applications
Subject to diagnosis, professional training, local regulations and the device’s authorized indications, radial pressure-wave or therapeutic-ultrasound protocols may be considered for selected musculoskeletal concerns such as: Plantar-fascia pain Achilles-tendon concerns Patellar-tendon concerns Lateral or medial elbow tendinopathy Selected shoulder-tendon conditions Myofascial trigger points Muscle tension Selected sports-related soft-tissue conditions Other professionally assessed rehabilitation applications Evidence and recommended treatment methods vary between conditions. The device should not be represented as universally effective for every pain, tendon, joint or soft-tissue disorder. Applications That Should Not Be Claimed Without Specific Authorization
The Ultrashock Master should not automatically be promoted for: Erectile-dysfunction treatment Peyronie’s plaque or penile-curvature correction Fat reduction Weight loss Permanent cellulite elimination Treatment of every form of back or neck pain Bone treatment requiring focused high-energy shockwaves Guaranteed tissue regeneration Guaranteed inflammation reduction Unsupervised home treatment Radial pressure waves are not equivalent to the focused low-intensity shockwaves evaluated in most erectile-dysfunction research. Twelve Interchangeable Applicator Heads The system includes twelve radial pressure-wave applicator heads in different sizes and shapes. This allows qualified operators to select an applicator according to: Treatment area Target-tissue size Surface anatomy Desired pressure distribution Patient tolerance Approved clinical protocol Larger heads may support broader-area treatment, while smaller heads may provide more localized contact. Applicator choice must follow the user manual and professional training. Applicator size alone does not determine treatment depth or clinical outcome. Twenty Pre-Programmed Body-Area Menus The 10.4-inch touchscreen includes: Ten radial pressure-wave menus Ten therapeutic-ultrasound menus These menus provide convenient starting points for equipment setup and workflow. Pre-programmed settings do not replace: Clinical diagnosis Physical examination Knowledge of anatomy Contraindication screening Individual parameter adjustment Monitoring during treatment Professional judgment Operators remain responsible for confirming that each setting is appropriate for the individual patient. Build a Flexible Rehabilitation Workflow Radial Pressure-Wave Treatments
Use the pneumatic handpiece with the appropriate applicator for professionally assessed soft-tissue and musculoskeletal applications. Therapeutic-Ultrasound Treatments
Use the 1 MHz ultrasound handpiece in continuous or pulsed mode according to the treatment goal and clinical protocol. Sequential Modality Planning
A qualified professional may use both modalities within a broader rehabilitation plan when appropriate. The modalities should not automatically be applied to the same area or combined solely to claim stronger results. Treatment sequence and parameters must be clinically justified. Multi-Site Professional Use
The protective aluminium case supports organized storage and transportation between suitable treatment environments. Operators remain responsible for safe transportation, sanitation, inspection and equipment setup. How a Professional Session Works 1. Clinical Assessment
The practitioner reviews the patient’s symptoms, history, diagnosis, treatment area and contraindications. Imaging or additional medical assessment may be necessary for certain conditions. 2. Modality Selection
Radial pressure-wave therapy or therapeutic ultrasound is selected according to the clinical objective. 3. Applicator or Handpiece Preparation
The appropriate pressure-wave head or ultrasound handpiece is inspected and installed. 4. Treatment-Area Preparation
The treatment area is positioned and an appropriate coupling gel is applied where required. 5. Parameter Selection
Pressure, frequency, impact count, ultrasound intensity, pulse mode and treatment time are adjusted according to the approved protocol. 6. Controlled Treatment
Treatment is delivered while the practitioner monitors comfort, tissue response and device performance. 7. Documentation and Follow-Up
Parameters and patient response are recorded, and the practitioner determines whether further treatment is appropriate. Temporary discomfort, redness, bruising, swelling or tenderness may occur after radial pressure-wave treatment. Therapeutic ultrasound risks depend on intensity, duration and treatment location. Technical Specifications
The five-million-impact figure is a manufacturer-stated component rating, not a guarantee that every wear component will operate for five million impacts without maintenance. What Is Included? Main Equipment
One Ultrashock Master control system One pneumatic radial pressure-wave handpiece One 1 MHz therapeutic-ultrasound handpiece Twelve interchangeable pressure-wave applicator heads One power cable suitable for the selected market Required connection accessories Starter coupling gel, where applicable Transport and Storage
One protective aluminium case Organized storage for the machine, handpieces and accessories Protective external shipping carton Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and setup guidance Radial pressure-wave operating guidance Therapeutic-ultrasound operating guidance Cleaning and maintenance instructions Contraindication-screening guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Final accessories and package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: System installation Touchscreen navigation Pressure-wave handpiece setup Applicator-head selection Pressure, frequency and impact adjustment Therapeutic-ultrasound operation Ultrasound intensity and pulse-mode selection Coupling-gel application Patient screening Cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not replace professional physiotherapy education, medical diagnosis or any license required in the operator’s jurisdiction. Three-Year Parts Warranty
The Ultrashock Master is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical support. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty conditions, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main control system Internal electronic components Touchscreen Original pneumatic handpiece Original ultrasound handpiece Internal compressor components Original connectors Other eligible machine parts Applicators, projectiles, seals, filters and other wear components may have separate coverage terms. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning or storage Damage caused by dropping a handpiece Normal projectile or applicator wear Filter and seal replacement Damage caused by liquid entering a handpiece Unauthorized transportation damage Failure to follow the operating manual All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Maintenance and Operating Care Coupling Media
Use the coupling gel or lubricant specified for the selected modality. Do not allow gel or liquid to enter the pressure-wave handpiece, connectors or ventilation openings. Wear-Component Inspection
Inspect the projectile, internal guide components, applicators, seals and connections regularly. Although the listed projectile-life rating is up to five million impacts, other internal wear components may require inspection or replacement earlier. Filter-Cup Maintenance
Follow the supplied manual when draining or cleaning the pneumatic filter cup. Disconnect the system from power before performing applicable maintenance. Handpiece Inspection
Check each applicator and handpiece for cracks, looseness, unusual vibration or performance changes before use. Storage
Keep the system and aluminium case in a clean, dry and climate-controlled environment. Contraindications and Safety Precautions The Ultrashock Master is professional therapeutic equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. Treatment may be contraindicated or require additional assessment when the treatment field includes: Active infection Open wounds Malignant tumor A fetus Significant bleeding or coagulation disorder Thrombosis A pacemaker or implanted electronic device Severely impaired sensation Major nerves or sensitive anatomical structures Lung tissue or other air-containing organs Brain or spinal structures Active growth plates Other contraindications listed in the user manual High energy should not be applied directly over vulnerable organs, large blood vessels or other prohibited areas. This is not an exhaustive list. Appropriate examination, diagnosis and clinical clearance are required before treatment. Intended Professional Users
The Ultrashock Master is suitable for: Physiotherapy practices Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine clinics Orthopedic rehabilitation practices Licensed multidisciplinary clinics Qualified physical therapists Other appropriately trained healthcare professionals The system is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose Ultrashock Master?
Two Treatment Modalities
Combine radial pressure-wave treatment and 1 MHz therapeutic ultrasound within one system. Twelve Applicator Heads
Select from multiple applicator sizes and shapes for different professionally assessed areas. Wide Parameter Range
Adjust radial pressure from 1–6 bar, frequency from 1–21 Hz and ultrasound intensity from 0.2–3.0 W/cm². Twenty Body-Area Menus
Access ten menus for radial pressure-wave operation and ten for therapeutic ultrasound. Protective Aluminium Case
Store and transport the machine, handpieces and accessories in an organized protective case. Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes professional training, a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical assistance. Frequently Asked Questions
Is Ultrashock Master a focused shockwave system?
No. It uses pneumatic ballistic radial pressure-wave technology. Radial and focused shockwaves have different physical characteristics. What is the second treatment modality?
The system includes a 1 MHz therapeutic-ultrasound handpiece with continuous and pulsed operating modes. Can the system be used for erectile dysfunction?
This pneumatic radial pressure-wave system should not be marketed as an ED-treatment device without a specific authorized indication and supporting clinical evidence for this exact technology. Can it remove fat or cellulite?
The supplied operating parameters do not establish guaranteed fat reduction or cellulite removal. These claims should not be used without specific evidence and regulatory authorization. Can both modalities be used during one appointment?
A qualified practitioner may incorporate both modalities into a treatment plan when clinically appropriate. They should not automatically be combined for every patient or condition. Does every treatment use the pre-programmed settings?
No. The body-area menus provide starting configurations. The practitioner remains responsible for assessment and appropriate parameter selection. Is treatment painless?
No treatment experience is identical. Pressure-wave therapy may produce discomfort, tenderness or temporary bruising. Settings should be adjusted according to clinical needs and patient tolerance. Is training included?
Yes. Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. This does not replace professional physiotherapy qualifications. What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine parts. Wear components, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Upgrade Your Professional Physiotherapy Platform
The Ultrashock Master combines: Pneumatic radial pressure-wave technology One-megahertz therapeutic ultrasound Twelve interchangeable applicator heads Twenty pre-programmed body-area menus A protective aluminium transport case Available for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Radial pressure waves
Focused shockwaves
Generated by a projectile striking an applicator
Generated by electrohydraulic, electromagnetic or piezoelectric mechanisms
Highest energy is generally near the applicator surface
Energy is concentrated at a defined focal point
Pressure spreads outward in a radial pattern
Energy can be delivered to a selected focal depth
Parameters are commonly expressed in bar and Hz
Parameters commonly include energy-flux density
Often used for soft-tissue and musculoskeletal applications
Used for selected focused clinical applications
Specification
Details
Product name
Ultrashock Master
Product type
Professional dual-modality physiotherapy system
Included modalities
Pneumatic radial pressure waves and therapeutic ultrasound
Radial pressure setting
1–6 bar
Radial frequency
1–21 Hz
Adjustable impact count
800–3,000 impacts
Applicator heads
Twelve interchangeable heads
Listed projectile-life rating
Up to five million impacts
Ultrasound frequency
1 MHz
Ultrasound intensity
0.2–3.0 W/cm²
Ultrasound modes
Continuous and pulsed
Ultrasound pulse frequency
1–10 Hz
Treatment-time setting
1–60 minutes
Display
10.4-inch color touchscreen
Pressure-wave menus
Ten body-area menus
Ultrasound menus
Ten body-area menus
Rated power
250 W
Net weight
Approximately 28 kg
Gross weight
Approximately 30 kg
Package dimensions
58 × 46 × 42 cm
Transport and storage
Aluminium protective case
Warranty
Three-year limited parts warranty
Technical support
Lifetime remote support
Receives in 7 days.
$1,599.00
Professional Portable Electromagnetic Shockwave System
Wireless Technology for Qualified Medical and Men’s Health Practices
The ESWT PRO is a compact electromagnetic shockwave system developed for qualified healthcare professionals and specialized clinical environments.
A wireless treatment handpiece, 7-inch touchscreen, adjustable intensity and pre-programmed operating modes support flexible use in men’s health, rehabilitation and other applications permitted by the device’s certification and local regulations.
At approximately 4.5 kg, the system is suitable for clinics requiring a compact platform that can be repositioned or transported between approved treatment locations.
Electromagnetic technology | Wireless handpiece | 4.5 kg system | Three-year warranty
Electromagnetic Shockwave Technology
ESWT PRO generates shockwave pulses using an electromagnetic mechanism rather than a pneumatic compressor.
Key operating features include:
-
Adjustable intensity from levels 1–10
-
Selectable pulse frequency from 10–20 Hz
-
Wireless treatment handpiece
-
Precision applicator
-
Pre-programmed operating modes
-
Color touchscreen control
-
Rechargeable portable operation
Electromagnetic and pneumatic systems use different energy-generation mechanisms. One technology should not be described as universally safer, more effective or more comfortable without direct comparative evidence for the specific devices.
Portable Wireless Design
The ESWT PRO platform is designed for professional mobility within appropriate clinical environments.
Lightweight System
At approximately 4.5 kg, the system is easier to transport and reposition than many full-size shockwave platforms.
Wireless Handpiece
The rechargeable handpiece reduces cable restrictions during operation and can be returned to the supplied charging dock between treatments.
Extended Battery Operation
The supplied specification lists more than 10 hours of operation per full charge. Actual battery life may vary according to intensity, frequency, treatment duration and battery condition.
Compact Desktop Footprint
The system measures approximately 28 × 22 × 15 cm with its dock, allowing installation in treatment rooms where space is limited.
Portable design does not automatically authorize house calls or mobile medical treatment. Operators remain responsible for maintaining privacy, hygiene, documentation, electrical safety and local healthcare compliance.
Potential Professional Applications
Depending on the device’s registered indications and applicable local regulations, shockwave technology may be evaluated for use within professional programs concerning:
-
Selected cases of vasculogenic erectile dysfunction
-
Men’s sexual-health assessment programs
-
Rehabilitation applications
-
Musculoskeletal treatment protocols
-
Other manufacturer-authorized professional uses
Low-intensity shockwave therapy should not be advertised as suitable for every cause or severity of erectile dysfunction.
ED may have vascular, neurological, hormonal, medication-related, psychological or mixed causes. Proper medical assessment is required before determining whether shockwave treatment is appropriate.
Evidence-Informed Positioning for Erectile Dysfunction Published research suggests that low-intensity shockwave therapy may produce a modest improvement in erectile-function scores in some men with vasculogenic ED. However: Results are not consistent across all studies Device technologies and energy outputs vary Treatment protocols are not fully standardized Not every ED cause is vascular Benefits may diminish over time No result can be guaranteed Regulatory status differs between countries Clinical Use Requires Proper Patient Selection Appropriate patient assessment should include: Complete medical history Sexual history Medication review Cardiovascular-risk assessment Identification of possible vascular, hormonal or neurological causes Review of previous ED treatments Physical examination where clinically indicated Validated erectile-function questionnaire where appropriate Discussion of available treatment alternatives Informed consent Only a qualified healthcare professional should diagnose erectile dysfunction or decide whether shockwave therapy is appropriate. Important Limitations of Use
ESWT PRO should not be promoted for: Guaranteed treatment of all ED severity levels Permanent restoration of erectile function Premature-ejaculation treatment without supporting indication Dissolution of Peyronie’s plaque Correction of penile curvature Guaranteed recovery following prostate surgery Replacement of prescribed medication Unsupervised home use Sexual-performance enhancement in clients without medical assessment For Peyronie’s disease, shockwave therapy may be considered for pain in some circumstances, but it should not be marketed as reducing plaque size or correcting curvature. Professional Treatment Workflow 1. Medical Assessment
A qualified professional reviews the patient’s medical and sexual history, cardiovascular status, medications, previous treatments and possible contraindications. 2. Treatment Planning
The clinician determines whether shockwave therapy is appropriate and selects a protocol consistent with the device instructions and applicable clinical guidance. 3. System Preparation
The wireless handpiece is checked, the applicator is prepared and the treatment area is positioned according to the approved protocol. 4. Parameter Selection
Intensity, frequency, pulse count and treatment locations are selected by the qualified operator. 5. Controlled Treatment
Shockwave pulses are delivered while the operator monitors patient comfort and tissue response. 6. Post-Treatment Review
The patient receives appropriate guidance, and the treatment parameters and any adverse responses are documented. 7. Follow-Up Assessment
Progress should be evaluated using an appropriate clinical method rather than relying only on subjective marketing claims. Treatment Protocols The appropriate protocol depends on: Confirmed diagnosis Device energy characteristics Energy flux density Pulse count Pulse frequency Treatment locations Patient response Clinical guidance Local regulatory requirements The supplied specifications mention pre-programmed ED modes and typical sessions of approximately 12–15 minutes. These settings should not be represented as universal clinical protocols. A fixed course of 12–16 treatments, monthly maintenance or permanent maintenance benefits should not be promised without evidence for the specific device and patient. Technical Specifications
What Is Included? Main Equipment
One ESWT PRO control system One wireless treatment handpiece One precision applicator One desktop charging dock Power supply suitable for the selected market Documentation and Certification
English user manual CE certificate Applicable ISO documentation Installation and setup guidance Operating instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Technical-support information Professional Training
Equipment setup training Touchscreen and handpiece operation Intensity and frequency adjustment Patient-screening guidance Contraindication review Treatment documentation Cleaning and infection-control guidance Basic troubleshooting Training certificate after completion Final package contents should be confirmed on the order quotation. CE-Certified Professional System
The ESWT PRO comes with: CE Certificate Applicable ISO Documentation The equipment must be used only for the indications and within the jurisdictions covered by its applicable certification and registration. Professional Training and Support
Wikbeauty provides remote equipment training covering: System installation Wireless handpiece charging Touchscreen navigation Applicator preparation Intensity and frequency controls Pre-programmed modes Patient-screening principles Basic operating procedures Cleaning and maintenance Troubleshooting A training certificate is provided after completion. Equipment training does not qualify an unlicensed person to diagnose or treat erectile dysfunction. Medical training, professional licensing and local authorization remain the operator’s responsibility. Three-Year Parts Warranty
The ESWT PRO is supported by a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical support. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects may be covered for: Main control system Internal electronic components Touchscreen Original wireless handpiece Charging dock Power-supply components Other eligible original parts Battery cells, applicators and other consumable or limited-life components may have separate coverage conditions. Technical-Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, Wikbeauty will assist with: Remote assessment Guided diagnostic testing Identification of the affected component Confirmation of warranty eligibility Replacement-part assistance where applicable Remote installation guidance Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Incorrect operation or misuse Unauthorized repair or modification Incorrect charging or electrical connection Improper cleaning or storage Damage caused by dropping the handpiece Normal battery degradation Normal applicator wear Unauthorized transportation damage Use outside the supplied instructions All coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Contraindications and Clinical Precautions This is professional equipment. Screening must be performed by a qualified healthcare professional. Treatment may be contraindicated or require additional assessment in patients with: Active infection or inflammation in the treatment area Open wounds or significant skin injury Active malignancy in or near the treatment area Significant bleeding disorders Anticoagulant use Recent surgery in the treatment area Implanted devices affected by electromagnetic equipment Severe uncontrolled cardiovascular disease Untreated hypertension Significant neurological impairment affecting sensation Other contraindications identified in the user manual Penile implants, recent pelvic procedures and complex urological conditions require specialist evaluation. This is not an exhaustive list. The operator must follow the device manual, applicable medical guidance and local regulations. Intended Professional Users
ESWT PRO is intended for appropriately qualified professionals working in settings such as: Urology practices Sexual-medicine clinics Men’s health centers Licensed medical clinics Rehabilitation practices where the device is appropriately registered Qualified multidisciplinary healthcare centers The device is not intended for casual, consumer or unsupervised home use. Why Choose ESWT PRO?
Electromagnetic Energy Generation
The system uses an electromagnetic mechanism rather than a pneumatic compressor. Wireless Handpiece
Rechargeable wireless operation supports flexible positioning during professional use. Compact 4.5 kg Design
The lightweight system is easier to transport and install than many full-size shockwave platforms. Adjustable Operation
Ten intensity levels and selectable 10–20 Hz frequency support protocol customization by qualified operators. Touchscreen Interface
A 7-inch color display provides access to controls and pre-programmed modes. Professional Training
Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. Long-Term Equipment Support
The system includes a three-year limited parts warranty and lifetime remote technical assistance. Frequently Asked Questions
What is electromagnetic shockwave therapy?
It is a method of generating shockwave pulses through an electromagnetic mechanism rather than a pneumatic compressor. Treatment characteristics depend on the device’s energy output, applicator and settings. Is it appropriate for every type of ED?
No. ED has vascular, neurological, hormonal, psychological, medication-related and mixed causes. Medical assessment is necessary before treatment. Is the treatment completely painless?
Patient experience varies. Adjustable intensity may help manage comfort, but pressure, vibration, sensitivity or discomfort may occur. How many sessions are required?
There is no universal protocol suitable for every device or patient. Session number and frequency must be selected by a qualified clinician. Can this machine be used for home visits?
Portable design may support professional mobility where legally permitted. The operator must maintain clinical privacy, sanitation, documentation and regulatory compliance. Is the device approved for ED treatment in every country?
No. Regulatory status and permitted indications vary by jurisdiction. The device must only be marketed and used within the indications covered by its applicable registration. Is training included?
Yes. Remote equipment training and a training certificate are included. This training does not replace professional medical qualifications. What does the warranty cover?
The three-year limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved parts. Consumables, normal battery wear, accidental damage and misuse are excluded. What certifications are included?
The machine comes with a CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation. Add Portable Shockwave Technology to Your Practice
ESWT PRO combines: Electromagnetic shockwave generation Wireless handpiece operation Ten adjustable intensity levels A compact 4.5 kg design A seven-inch touchscreen interface Available exclusively for qualified professional use and subject to applicable local regulations. Request Professional Pricing and Product Information
Specification
Details
Product name
ESWT PRO
Product type
Portable professional shockwave system
Energy-generation method
Electromagnetic
Adjustable intensity
Levels 1–10
Pulse frequency
10–20 Hz
Treatment handpiece
Wireless rechargeable handpiece
User interface
7-inch color touchscreen
Pre-programmed modes
Five ED-focused operating programs
Typical session duration
Approximately 12–15 minutes, protocol dependent
Listed battery operation
More than 10 hours per charge
Charging system
Desktop charging dock
System weight
Approximately 4.5 kg
Dimensions with dock
Approximately 28 × 22 × 15 cm
Warranty
Three-year limited parts warranty
Technical support
Lifetime remote support
Certification
CE certificate and applicable ISO documentation
Receives in 7 days.
$1,699.00
Professional EMS and Radial Shockwave Therapy System
Dual-Technology Platform for Physiotherapy, Muscle Conditioning, and Rehabilitation
The Wikbeauty EMSHOCK is a professional 2-in-1 physiotherapy system that combines Electrical Muscle Stimulation and radial shockwave therapy on one compact platform.
Its reusable vacuum EMS cups provide hands-free muscle stimulation, while the dedicated shockwave handpiece delivers adjustable acoustic energy to targeted soft-tissue and musculoskeletal areas. Both functions have independent control interfaces and can support combined treatment programs.
With nine EMS modes, dual-channel control, adjustable frequency up to 30Hz, shockwave energy up to 200mJ, a 10.4-inch touchscreen, and an 8kg portable design, EMSHOCK is suitable for physiotherapy, rehabilitation, sports recovery, and professional wellness applications.
EMS and radial shockwave | Hands-free vacuum cups | Nine EMS modes | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Technologies on One Platform Electrical Muscle Stimulation
The EMS function delivers controlled electrical impulses through reusable vacuum treatment cups. These impulses produce repeated muscle contractions and relaxation cycles without requiring voluntary exercise during treatment. Common applications include: Muscle-conditioning programs Post-injury muscle rehabilitation Muscle-weakness support Atrophy-prevention programs Sports-recovery treatments General muscle stimulation Radial Shockwave Therapy
The shockwave handpiece delivers controlled acoustic energy to selected soft-tissue and musculoskeletal areas. Practitioners can adjust energy, frequency, preload, and total impact count according to the treatment protocol. Common applications include: Tendon and soft-tissue treatments Musculoskeletal rehabilitation Sports-injury recovery Chronic pain-management support Professionally administered ED protocols Selected body-contouring treatments Simultaneous Dual-Technology Operation The self-vacuum EMS cups operate hands-free while the practitioner controls the radial shockwave handpiece. This allows both technologies to be incorporated into the same treatment appointment. This integrated configuration supports: Muscle and connective-tissue treatments Hands-free EMS stimulation Practitioner-controlled shockwave delivery Treatment of the same or different suitable areas Customizable combined protocols Efficient professional workflows Select the Right Program for Each Client Muscle-Conditioning Program
Uses the EMS function to provide controlled muscle stimulation through one or two independently managed channels. Recommended applications: Muscle strengthening support Muscle endurance programs Post-injury muscle conditioning Reduced muscle-use concerns General rehabilitation support Recommended for: Physiotherapy clients Rehabilitation clients Athletes and active adults Clients with professionally assessed muscle weakness Physiotherapy Shockwave Program
Uses adjustable radial shockwave parameters for professionally assessed musculoskeletal and soft-tissue concerns. Recommended applications: Tendon and connective-tissue treatments Shoulder, elbow, wrist, and hand programs Hip, knee, ankle, and foot treatments Plantar-area treatments Chronic musculoskeletal concerns Recommended for: Physiotherapy clients Clients with professionally assessed soft-tissue conditions Rehabilitation and recovery clients Combined EMS and Shockwave Program
Combines hands-free EMS treatment with practitioner-controlled radial shockwave therapy during the same appointment. Recommended applications: Muscle and tendon rehabilitation Post-injury recovery Sports-rehabilitation programs Combined muscle and soft-tissue treatment Functional recovery support Recommended for: Clients requiring multi-layer treatment Sports and rehabilitation clients Clinics offering combined physiotherapy programs Sports-Recovery Program
Uses EMS muscle stimulation, radial shockwave therapy, or both technologies according to the treatment objective. Recommended applications: Muscle recovery Tendon overuse conditions Post-activity conditioning Sports-injury rehabilitation Return-to-activity support Recommended for: Athletes Active adults Fitness clients Sports-recovery facilities Nine Adjustable EMS Treatment Modes
The EMS function provides nine treatment modes with adjustable frequency and energy. Mode selection should follow client assessment and the supplied professional protocols. Dual-Channel Independent Control
Channel A and Channel B can be managed separately, allowing professionals to customize settings for different muscle groups or suitable treatment areas. Common benefits include: Independent intensity adjustment Separate treatment settings Two-area muscle stimulation Personalized client programs Flexible rehabilitation planning Reusable Self-Vacuum Cups
The EMS cups use suction to maintain contact with suitable treatment areas. Common benefits include: Hands-free operation Reusable applicators No adhesive electrode pads Reduced disposable-accessory requirements Efficient applicator placement Adjustable Shockwave Treatment Settings
The radial shockwave function allows practitioners to personalize the treatment according to the selected area and professional protocol. Shockwave settings must be selected according to client assessment, target tissue, treatment objective, and individual response. Adjustable Treatment Areas Upper-Body Areas
The EMS cups and shockwave handpiece support various upper-body muscle and soft-tissue programs. Common treatment areas include: Shoulder Upper back Elbow Forearm Hand and wrist Suitable upper-arm muscle groups Lower-Body Areas
The two technologies can be selected independently or incorporated into a combined treatment plan. Common treatment areas include: Hip Thigh Knee Calf Achilles tendon Foot and ankle Plantar area Body and Intimate Wellness Areas
Suitable professional protocols may also support selected body-contouring and intimate wellness services. Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Waist Buttocks Thighs Localized body areas Professionally assessed ED treatment zones Professional Treatment Applications Common Musculoskeletal Applications EMSHOCK may be incorporated into professional treatment plans for suitable clients with: Tennis elbow Tendinitis and tendinopathy Plantar fasciitis Frozen shoulder Achilles tendon concerns Ankle, knee, shoulder, and wrist concerns Muscle weakness Post-injury muscle atrophy Chronic musculoskeletal conditions Suitable calcium-deposit concerns Post-injury soft-tissue rehabilitation Sports-related overuse conditions Diagnosis, client suitability, treatment settings, and expected outcomes should be determined by an appropriately qualified professional. How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, symptoms, diagnosis where applicable, medications, previous procedures, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Technology and Area Selection
Choose EMS, radial shockwave, or a combined treatment. Identify the appropriate muscle groups and professionally assessed shockwave treatment areas. Step 3: Applicator and Parameter Setup
Position the vacuum EMS cups over suitable muscle groups. Select Channel A or B settings, EMS mode, frequency, and energy. Configure shockwave energy, frequency, preload, and impact count. Step 4: Active Treatment
Begin the selected EMS program. When appropriate, the practitioner can deliver radial shockwave therapy to the same or another suitable area while the EMS cups operate hands-free. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop both functions, remove the EMS cups, inspect the treatment areas, document the selected settings, and provide appropriate post-treatment guidance. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The EMSHOCK combines two professional treatment technologies within a lightweight and portable desktop system. Key advantages include: EMS and radial shockwave technologies Hands-free reusable vacuum EMS cups Nine EMS treatment modes Adjustable EMS frequency up to 30Hz Ten EMS energy levels Dual-channel independent EMS control Shockwave energy up to 200mJ Adjustable shockwave frequency and preload Integrated impact counter Body-part selection menu Independent treatment interfaces 10.4-inch color touchscreen 150W power consumption Compact 46 × 53 × 38cm design Lightweight 8kg construction 100–220V power compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year parts warranty Professional training and lifetime support Technical Specifications
What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty EMSHOCK main unit 1 × Radial shockwave treatment handpiece Reusable self-vacuum EMS treatment cups Dual-channel EMS connection system Integrated 10.4-inch color touchscreen Nine EMS treatment modes Independent Channel A and Channel B controls Adjustable shockwave control system Integrated body-part selection menu Real-time impact counter Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories The final number and configuration of EMS cups and shockwave heads should follow the selected package. Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions EMS operation training Shockwave operation training Vacuum-cup placement guidance EMS mode and intensity guidance Shockwave parameter guidance Physiotherapy protocol training Sports-recovery protocol training Combined-treatment guidance Client-screening documentation Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMSHOCK system includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use both technologies safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen and interface operation Client consultation and screening Vacuum EMS cup placement Channel A and Channel B controls EMS mode selection EMS frequency and energy adjustment Shockwave handpiece operation Shockwave energy and frequency adjustment Preload and impact-count settings Combined EMS and shockwave treatments Physiotherapy and sports-recovery protocols Equipment cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMSHOCK includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Shockwave heads, projectiles, seals, vacuum cups, tubing, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable components, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A detailed health consultation, professional assessment, and informed consent should be completed before treatment. EMSHOCK should only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active thrombosis or blood clots Anticoagulant therapy without appropriate clearance Malignant tumors or known cancer in the treatment area Active skin infection Open wounds within the treatment area Severely impaired sensation Active growth plates in children Recent surgery within the treatment area Metal implants requiring professional clearance Serious cardiovascular conditions Neurological conditions affected by electrical stimulation Medical conditions requiring physician supervision Do not place EMS applicators or deliver shockwave energy over prohibited anatomical regions, including areas identified as unsuitable in the operating manual. Additional considerations for ED treatments include: Active infection or inflammation Penile implants or prostheses Unexplained pain, lesions, or bleeding Conditions requiring specialist medical assessment Client eligibility, diagnosis, treatment parameters, and medical clearance must be determined according to the application and applicable professional requirements. Operating Precautions
Inspect the machine, handpiece, cups, tubing, cables, and accessories before use. Select the correct technology and treatment protocol. Position vacuum cups only on suitable muscle areas. Begin with conservative energy and frequency settings. Increase intensity progressively according to client response. Use suitable coupling medium for shockwave treatment. Monitor client comfort throughout the session. Do not treat prohibited anatomical areas. Record EMS and shockwave settings. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected or severe discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMSHOCK is intended for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in: Physiotherapy clinics Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine facilities Musculoskeletal treatment practices Fitness and recovery centers Men’s wellness clinics Medical spas Body-contouring clinics Integrated wellness facilities Practitioners must review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering EMS or shockwave treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMSHOCK?
Two Technologies on One Platform
The system combines Electrical Muscle Stimulation and radial shockwave therapy for muscle, tendon, soft-tissue, and recovery programs. Hands-Free Vacuum EMS Cups
Reusable self-vacuum cups maintain contact without adhesive pads, allowing the EMS function to operate while the practitioner performs suitable shockwave treatments. Independent Dual-Channel Control
Channel A and Channel B can be configured separately for personalized muscle-stimulation programs. Portable Professional Design
At 8kg with a compact desktop footprint, EMSHOCK is suitable for treatment rooms, multi-room facilities, and professional transport. Complete Professional Support
The package includes dual-technology training, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is EMSHOCK?
EMSHOCK is a professional 2-in-1 system combining Electrical Muscle Stimulation with radial shockwave therapy. What is the difference between the two technologies?
EMS delivers controlled electrical impulses to targeted muscles. Radial shockwave delivers acoustic pressure waves to professionally identified soft-tissue and musculoskeletal areas. Can both functions be used during the same appointment?
Yes. The vacuum EMS cups can operate hands-free while a practitioner delivers shockwave treatment to the same or another suitable area, when supported by the selected protocol. How are the vacuum cups different from adhesive electrodes?
The reusable cups use suction to maintain contact and do not require disposable adhesive pads. Correct placement, suction level, cleaning, and client screening remain essential. How many EMS modes are available?
The system includes nine EMS treatment modes, adjustable frequency up to 30Hz, and ten energy levels. Can two muscle groups be treated?
The machine includes two independently controlled EMS channels. Suitable treatment configurations depend on the number of cups supplied and the selected protocol. What is the maximum shockwave energy?
The radial shockwave function provides maximum energy up to 200mJ. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the shoulder, elbow, wrist, back, hip, thigh, knee, calf, Achilles tendon, foot, ankle, abdomen, buttocks, and other professionally assessed areas. How long does a treatment take?
Shockwave treatment may take approximately 10 minutes per area. EMS sessions commonly take 20–30 minutes. Combined appointment time depends on the selected protocol and number of areas. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocols indicate three to four shockwave sessions for some conditions and six to twelve EMS sessions for muscle-conditioning programs. The final plan should be individualized following professional assessment. Can EMSHOCK support ED treatment protocols?
The shockwave function may support professionally administered ED protocols. This application should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals following screening and applicable local requirements. Is treatment uncomfortable?
EMS commonly produces pulsing and muscle-contraction sensations. Shockwave may cause temporary discomfort over sensitive areas. Both technologies have adjustable settings to support appropriate client tolerance. Are treatment results guaranteed?
No. Results vary according to the condition, treatment area, selected settings, number of sessions, client health, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers EMS, shockwave therapy, vacuum-cup placement, parameter selection, combined protocols, safety, client screening, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Dual-Technology Physiotherapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty EMSHOCK enables qualified professionals to combine hands-free muscle stimulation and radial shockwave therapy using one lightweight platform. Five key benefits: Electrical Muscle Stimulation and radial shockwave technology Nine EMS modes with independent dual-channel control Reusable hands-free vacuum EMS cups Adjustable shockwave energy up to 200mJ CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
EMS Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Treatment Modes
Nine
Different muscle-stimulation patterns
Maximum Frequency
30Hz
Adjustable stimulation speed
Energy Levels
1–10
Progressive intensity control
Output Channels
Two independent channels
Treatment of two suitable muscle groups
Maximum Output
100V
Professional EMS delivery
Applicators
Reusable vacuum cups
Hands-free muscle stimulation
Channel Control
Channel A and Channel B
Independent parameter management
Shockwave Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Maximum Energy
200mJ
Adjustable acoustic-wave output
Frequency
Adjustable
Personalized impact-delivery speed
Preload
Adjustable
Controlled handpiece response
Impact Counter
Real-time tracking
Accurate session documentation
Body-Part Menu
Integrated
Protocol and treatment-area selection
Control Interface
Independent touchscreen interface
Shockwave parameter management
Typical Area Time
Approximately 10 minutes
Efficient targeted treatments
Treatment Category
Common Applications
Recommended Technology
Muscle Conditioning
Muscle activation, endurance, and strength support
EMS
Physiotherapy
Musculoskeletal and soft-tissue programs
Shockwave or combined
Sports Recovery
Muscle, tendon, and activity-related rehabilitation
EMS and shockwave
Post-Injury Rehabilitation
Muscle conditioning and functional recovery
Combined program
Body Contouring
Muscle-toning and selected body programs
EMS or combined
Erectile-Function Programs
Professionally administered acoustic-wave protocols
Shockwave
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty EMSHOCK
Model
ESWT-KA
Technology
Electrical Muscle Stimulation and radial shockwave
Power Input
100–220V, 60Hz
Power Consumption
150W
Maximum Shockwave Energy
200mJ
Shockwave Controls
Energy, frequency, preload, and impact count
EMS Maximum Output
100V
EMS Frequency
Adjustable up to 30Hz
EMS Treatment Modes
Nine
EMS Energy Levels
Levels 1–10
EMS Channels
Two independently controlled channels
EMS Applicators
Reusable self-vacuum cups
Display
10.4-inch color touchscreen
Control System
Independent EMS and shockwave interfaces
Dimensions
46 × 53 × 38cm
Net Weight
8kg
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Receives in 7 days.
$2,900.00
Professional Compact Dual-Technology Shockwave System
Electromagnetic and Pneumatic Shockwave Therapy in a Portable Flight-Case Design
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini is a professional extracorporeal shockwave therapy system that combines electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave technologies on one compact platform.
The electromagnetic handpiece delivers focused acoustic energy for precise treatment areas, while the pneumatic handpiece produces radial pressure waves for broader soft-tissue and body applications. Practitioners can select the appropriate modality according to the treatment area and professional protocol.
With two treatment handpieces, 18 interchangeable treatment tips, three dedicated interfaces, a 10.4-inch touchscreen, and a compact flight-case design, the Dual Wave Mini is suitable for clinics that require multi-application performance without a large equipment footprint.
Two shockwave technologies | 18 treatment tips | Three dedicated modes | Compact flight case | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Shockwave Technologies on One Platform Electromagnetic Shockwave Technology
The electromagnetic handpiece uses a precision magnetic-coil mechanism to generate focused acoustic energy. Its concentrated delivery supports treatments requiring accurate energy placement within a selected area. Common applications include: Focused musculoskeletal treatments Tendon and soft-tissue programs Sports-injury rehabilitation Localized physiotherapy applications Erectile-function treatment protocols Targeted recovery programs Pneumatic Ballistic Shockwave Technology
The pneumatic handpiece uses compressed air to accelerate an internal projectile. The projectile strikes the selected treatment tip, creating radial pressure waves that disperse across a broader tissue area. Common applications include: Cellulite treatments Body-contouring programs Broad soft-tissue areas Physiotherapy treatments Sports-recovery programs Musculoskeletal rehabilitation Integrated Dual-Technology Operation
The two handpieces can be selected directly from the system, allowing practitioners to switch between electromagnetic and pneumatic treatments according to the application. This integrated configuration supports: Focused and radial treatment options Multiple professional applications Customizable treatment protocols Efficient service transitions Reduced equipment requirements Flexible clinical workflows Select the Right Treatment Mode for Each Client Erectile-Function Treatment Mode
The dedicated ED interface includes five mapped treatment zones, impact counting, preload selection, and switching between electromagnetic and pneumatic delivery. Recommended applications: Professional erectile-function protocols Vascular-support treatment programs Targeted acoustic-wave applications Structured multi-session treatments Recommended for: Appropriately screened adult male clients Men’s wellness clinics Qualified professionals offering ED protocols This application should only be provided within the practitioner’s permitted professional scope and according to applicable local requirements. Anti-Cellulite Treatment Mode
The anti-cellulite interface provides body-area mapping and customizable parameters for different treatment zones. Recommended applications: Cellulite appearance treatments Body-texture improvement Localized body-contouring programs Soft-tissue stimulation Skin-firming support Recommended for: Clients concerned about visible cellulite Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments Clinics offering structured body-care programs Physiotherapy Treatment Mode
The physiotherapy interface supports treatment planning for key musculoskeletal regions and provides adjustable shockwave parameters. Recommended applications: Tendon and soft-tissue treatments Shoulder, elbow, wrist, and hand programs Hip, knee, foot, and ankle treatments Musculoskeletal rehabilitation Localized pain-management support Recommended for: Physiotherapy clients Rehabilitation clients Clients with professionally assessed musculoskeletal concerns Sports-Recovery Program
Practitioners can select focused electromagnetic energy or radial pneumatic pressure waves according to the location, depth, and size of the treatment area. Recommended applications: Tendon overuse conditions Muscle and soft-tissue recovery Post-injury rehabilitation Shoulder, knee, and ankle programs Recommended for: Athletes Active adults Fitness and rehabilitation clients Sports-recovery facilities Electromagnetic Energy and Frequency Control
The electromagnetic handpiece provides adjustable focused-shockwave settings for precise professional applications. Settings should be selected according to professional assessment, treatment objectives, client response, and the supplied protocols. Pneumatic Pressure and Frequency Control
The pneumatic handpiece provides adjustable radial shockwave settings for broad and targeted treatment areas. Eighteen Interchangeable Treatment Tips
The Dual Wave Mini includes seven electromagnetic heads and eleven pneumatic heads to support different treatment areas and The correct treatment tip should be selected according to its intended function, treatment location, client condition, and professional protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Upper-Body Areas
The available electromagnetic and pneumatic heads support multiple upper-body physiotherapy and recovery programs. Common treatment areas include: Shoulder Elbow Hand and wrist Upper back Suitable arm muscles and tendons Lower-Body Areas
The handpiece, treatment tip, and parameters can be selected according to the size and location of the target area. Common treatment areas include: Hip Knee Thigh Achilles tendon Foot and ankle Plantar area Body and Intimate Wellness Areas
Dedicated interfaces and specialized treatment heads support professionally administered body and intimate wellness programs. Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Waist Buttocks Inner and outer thighs Legs Suitable ED treatment zones Professional Treatment Applications Common Musculoskeletal Applications
The Dual Wave Mini may be incorporated into professional treatment plans for suitable clients with: Tennis elbow Tendinitis and tendinopathy Plantar fasciitis Frozen shoulder Achilles tendon concerns Ankle, knee, shoulder, and wrist concerns Chronic musculoskeletal conditions Post-injury soft-tissue rehabilitation Professionally assessed tendon and ligament concerns Diagnosis, client suitability, treatment settings, and expected outcomes should be determined by an appropriately qualified professional. How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s medical history, symptoms, diagnosis where applicable, medications, previous procedures, treatment objectives, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Treatment Mode Selection
Select the ED, anti-cellulite, or physiotherapy interface. Choose the electromagnetic or pneumatic handpiece according to the application. Step 3: Tip and Parameter Selection
Install the appropriate treatment tip and select the required energy or pressure, frequency, preload, delivery mode, and number of impacts. Step 4: Shockwave Treatment
Apply suitable coupling medium when required and position the treatment head over the professionally identified area. Deliver the selected number of impacts while monitoring client response. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the treatment medium, inspect the area, document the selected settings and impact count, and provide appropriate post-treatment guidance. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Dual Wave Mini combines dual-technology performance with a portable, space-efficient flight-case design. Key advantages include: Electromagnetic and pneumatic shockwave technologies Two selectable professional handpieces Seven electromagnetic treatment heads Eleven pneumatic treatment heads Eighteen treatment tips in total Three dedicated treatment interfaces Adjustable electromagnetic energy and frequency Adjustable pneumatic pressure and frequency Two delivery modes Six customizable preload settings 10.4-inch touchscreen Treatment-area mapping Impact-counting function Reinforced treatment-tip construction Easy pneumatic projectile replacement Rear-mounted storage tank Compact flight-case design 110V and 220V compatibility Three-year professional warranty Professional training and ongoing support Technical Specifications
What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini main unit 1 × Electromagnetic shockwave handpiece 1 × Pneumatic ballistic shockwave handpiece 7 × Electromagnetic treatment heads 11 × Pneumatic treatment heads 18 × Total treatment tips 1 × Integrated 10.4-inch touchscreen Three dedicated treatment interfaces Two treatment-delivery modes Six preload settings Real-time impact counter Rear-mounted storage tank Compact flight case Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Dual-technology operation training Electromagnetic parameter guidance Pneumatic parameter guidance Treatment-tip selection guidance ED protocol training Anti-cellulite protocol training Physiotherapy protocol training Client-screening documentation Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Dual Wave Mini includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use both shockwave technologies safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen and interface operation Client consultation and screening Electromagnetic handpiece operation Pneumatic handpiece operation Treatment-tip selection Energy, pressure, and frequency adjustment Preload and impact-count settings ED treatment interface Anti-cellulite treatment interface Physiotherapy treatment interface Equipment cleaning and routine maintenance Pneumatic projectile replacement Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini includes a three-year professional warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Treatment heads, projectiles, seals, and other components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable components, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A detailed medical consultation, professional assessment, and informed consent should be completed before treatment. The Dual Wave Mini should only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active thrombosis or blood clots Anticoagulant therapy without appropriate medical clearance Malignant tumors or known cancer in the treatment area Active skin infection Open wounds within the treatment area Severely impaired sensation Active growth plates in children Recent surgery within the treatment area Metal implants requiring medical clearance Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision Additional considerations for ED treatments include: Active infection or inflammation Penile implants or prostheses Unexplained pain, lesions, or bleeding Conditions requiring specialist medical assessment Client eligibility, diagnosis, treatment parameters, and medical clearance must be determined according to the application and applicable professional requirements. Operating Precautions Inspect the machine, handpieces, cables, and treatment tips before use. Select the correct modality and treatment tip. Begin with conservative treatment settings. Increase energy or pressure progressively according to client response. Use suitable coupling medium where required. Monitor client comfort throughout the treatment. Do not treat prohibited anatomical areas. Record treatment settings and impact counts. Clean and disinfect reusable components after every client. Replace worn projectiles and components as directed. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected or severe discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini is intended for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in: Physiotherapy clinics Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine facilities Musculoskeletal treatment practices Men’s wellness clinics Medical spas Body-contouring clinics Integrated wellness centers Mobile or multi-location professional practices Practitioners must review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before providing shockwave treatments. OEM and ODM Customization
Wikbeauty provides OEM and ODM services for professional distributors, clinics, and equipment brands. Available customization may include: Technology configuration External case design Machine color customization Logo placement Interface customization Packaging design Product documentation Distributor branding Final customization options, minimum quantities, production time, and pricing should be confirmed with the Wikbeauty sales team. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini?
Two Shockwave Technologies
The system combines focused electromagnetic energy and radial pneumatic pressure waves for precise and broad-area applications. Eighteen Treatment Tips
Seven electromagnetic heads and eleven pneumatic heads provide extensive treatment flexibility across different anatomical regions. Three Dedicated Interfaces
Separate ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy modes simplify parameter selection, body mapping, and treatment tracking. Compact Flight-Case Design
The 48 × 58 × 50cm flight-case configuration is suitable for smaller treatment rooms, second treatment rooms, storage, transport, and multi-location practices. Complete Professional Support
The package includes dual-technology training, protocol guidance, OEM and ODM options, technical assistance, and a three-year professional warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Dual Wave Mini?
The Dual Wave Mini is a compact professional ESWT system that combines electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave technologies on one platform. How does it differ from the Dual Wave C?
The Dual Wave Mini provides the same two shockwave modalities in a smaller flight-case design. It includes 18 treatment tips, operates at 300W, weighs 35kg, and has a packing size of 48 × 58 × 50cm. What is the difference between the two handpieces?
The electromagnetic handpiece generates focused acoustic energy for precise treatment areas. The pneumatic handpiece creates radial pressure waves for broader soft-tissue and body applications. How many treatment tips are included?
The system includes 18 tips: seven electromagnetic heads and eleven pneumatic heads. What settings are available for the electromagnetic handpiece?
The electromagnetic handpiece provides energy from 5 to 200mJ and frequency from 1 to 16Hz. What settings are available for the pneumatic handpiece?
The pneumatic handpiece provides pressure from 1 to 6 Bar and frequency from 1 to 21Hz. Which treatment modes are available?
The system includes dedicated interfaces for ED treatments, anti-cellulite programs, and physiotherapy applications. Can the machine support ED treatment protocols?
Yes. It includes a dedicated ED interface and two specialized electromagnetic heads. Treatment should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals following screening and applicable local requirements. Can it be used for cellulite treatments?
Yes. The pneumatic handpiece and anti-cellulite interface support body-mapped cellulite and skin-texture programs. Is treatment uncomfortable?
Client experience varies according to the treatment area, condition, selected settings, and individual sensitivity. Parameters can be adjusted during treatment to maintain suitable tolerance. How many sessions are recommended?
Session number and frequency depend on the application, client condition, professional assessment, and selected protocol. Treatment outcomes and course length should not be guaranteed. Is the system suitable for mobile practitioners?
Its compact flight-case design makes it more portable than a full-size floor-standing system. Safe transport, equipment protection, and suitable treatment-room conditions remain essential. Does Wikbeauty provide OEM and ODM services?
Yes. Available services include equipment configuration, case design, logo customization, interface options, and packaging customization. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year professional warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers both technologies, treatment-tip selection, parameter adjustment, the three treatment interfaces, client screening, safety, cleaning, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Compact Dual-Technology Shockwave Therapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini enables qualified clinics and mobile practitioners to offer electromagnetic and pneumatic shockwave treatments using one compact professional platform. Five key benefits: Focused electromagnetic and radial pneumatic technologies Eighteen treatment tips for precise and broad applications Dedicated ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy interfaces Portable flight-case design with a design with a 10.4-inch touchscreen Professional training, OEM and ODM services, and a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, customization options, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Range
Professional Purpose
Energy
5–200mJ
Adjustable focused acoustic output
Frequency
1–16Hz
Customizable pulse-delivery speed
Treatment Heads
Seven
Different focused applications
ED-Specific Heads
Two
Dedicated professional protocols
Preload Settings
Six
Customizable treatment response
Control Interface
10.4-inch touchscreen
Parameter and protocol management
Setting
Available Range
Professional Purpose
Pressure
1–6 Bar
Adjustable radial-wave intensity
Frequency
1–21Hz
Customizable impact-delivery speed
Treatment Heads
Eleven
Broad treatment versatility
Head Diameters
6–25mm
Small and large treatment areas
Tip Replacement
Easy-change mechanism
Efficient treatment preparation
Mechanism
Compressed-air ballistic
Radial pressure-wave generation
Tip Group
Quantity
Primary Applications
Electromagnetic Heads
Seven
Precise and focused treatment areas
ED-Specific Heads
Two of the seven electromagnetic heads
Professional erectile-function protocols
Pneumatic Heads
Eleven
Radial and broad soft-tissue treatments
Pneumatic Tip Diameters
6mm, 10mm, 15mm, 20mm, and 25mm
Different anatomical areas
Total Treatment Tips
Eighteen
Multi-application treatment coverage
Treatment Category
Common Applications
Recommended Technology
Erectile-Function Programs
Professionally assessed acoustic-wave protocols
Electromagnetic or protocol-selected mode
Cellulite Treatments
Cellulite appearance and body texture
Pneumatic radial
Physiotherapy
Musculoskeletal and soft-tissue treatments
Electromagnetic or pneumatic
Sports Recovery
Muscle, tendon, and activity-related rehabilitation
Protocol-dependent
Musculoskeletal Rehabilitation
Functional recovery and localized discomfort
Focused or radial shockwave
Body Contouring
Abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, and legs
Pneumatic radial
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Dual Wave Mini
Model
Dual Wave Mini
Technology
Electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave
Input Voltage
AC 110V or 220V
Power Consumption
300W
Display
10.4-inch touchscreen
Treatment Handpieces
Two: electromagnetic and pneumatic
Treatment Modes
ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy
Electromagnetic Frequency
1–16Hz
Electromagnetic Energy
5–200mJ
Electromagnetic Heads
Seven, including two ED-specific heads
Pneumatic Frequency
1–21Hz
Pneumatic Pressure
1–6 Bar
Pneumatic Heads
Eleven
Pneumatic Tip Diameters
6mm, 10mm, 15mm, 20mm, and 25mm
Total Treatment Tips
Eighteen
Delivery Modes
Two
Preload Settings
Six
Special Features
Treatment mapping, impact tracking, storage tank, and easy projectile replacement
Packing Size
48 × 58 × 50cm
Weight
35kg
Design
Compact portable flight case
Warranty
Three-year professional warranty
Support
Professional training and ongoing technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$2,153.00
Professional Pneumatic Ballistic Shockwave Therapy System
Adjustable Air-Pressure Technology for Physiotherapy, Recovery, Body, and ED Applications
The Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B is a professional pneumatic ballistic shockwave system developed for physiotherapy, musculoskeletal rehabilitation, sports recovery, cellulite treatments, body-contouring programs, and professionally administered erectile-function protocols.
Its high-performance compressor accelerates an internal projectile inside the treatment handpiece, creating controlled pressure waves that are transferred into the selected treatment area through interchangeable heads.
The system provides adjustable pressure from 0.5 to 6 Bar, frequency from 1 to 21Hz, eleven treatment heads, continuous and pulse modes, six preload settings, an impact counter, and an upgraded ED treatment interface.
0.5–6 Bar pressure | Eleven treatment heads | 1–21Hz frequency | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform Pneumatic Ballistic Shockwave Technology
The ESWT-KP-B uses compressed air to accelerate a projectile inside the treatment handpiece. When the projectile reaches the selected treatment head, it generates mechanical pressure waves that travel into the targeted tissue. Common applications include: Physiotherapy treatments Musculoskeletal rehabilitation Sports-injury recovery Tendon and soft-tissue programs Cellulite treatments Body-contouring programs Professional erectile-function protocols Adjustable Continuous and Pulse Modes The system includes two delivery options for different professional treatment strategies. C Mode delivers continuous impacts according to the selected frequency. P Mode provides pulsed delivery for protocols requiring a different impact pattern. Common benefits include: Customizable treatment delivery Different programs for different conditions Adjustable client-comfort levels Precise impact management Flexible professional protocols Dedicated ED Treatment Software
The upgraded software includes a dedicated interface for professionally administered erectile-function protocols. It supports treatment-zone management, parameter adjustment, and accurate impact counting. Common features include: Dedicated ED treatment mode Five-zone treatment planning Adjustable pressure and frequency Real-time impact counting Structured multi-session protocols Professional treatment documentation ED applications should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice. Select the Right Program for Each Client Physiotherapy Program
Designed for professionally assessed musculoskeletal and soft-tissue conditions. Recommended applications: Tendon and soft-tissue treatments Shoulder, elbow, and wrist programs Hip, knee, and ankle treatments Plantar-area treatments Chronic musculoskeletal concerns Recommended for: Physiotherapy clients Rehabilitation clients Adults with professionally assessed musculoskeletal conditions Sports-Recovery Program
Uses customizable pressure, frequency, and treatment heads to support targeted recovery programs. Recommended applications: Overuse-related conditions Tendon recovery Muscle and soft-tissue rehabilitation Post-activity recovery support Suitable sports injuries Recommended for: Athletes Active adults Fitness and recovery clients Sports-rehabilitation facilities Anti-Cellulite and Body Program
Uses radial or flat treatment heads for broader body areas and professional aesthetic protocols. Recommended applications: Cellulite appearance treatments Body-texture improvement Localized body-contouring programs Skin-firming support Soft-tissue stimulation Recommended for: Clients concerned about visible cellulite Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments Clinics offering structured body-care programs Erectile-Function Treatment Program
Uses the upgraded ED treatment software and suitable heads for professionally administered acoustic-wave protocols. Recommended applications: Professionally assessed erectile-function concerns Vascular-support treatment programs Structured acoustic-wave treatment courses Men’s intimate wellness services Recommended for: Appropriately screened adult male clients Specialist men’s wellness clinics Qualified healthcare or wellness professionals Adjustable Pressure, Frequency, and Treatment Settings The ESWT-KP-B allows practitioners to customize shockwave treatments according to the selected application, treatment area, and client tolerance. All parameters should be selected according to professional assessment, treatment objectives, client response, and the supplied operating protocols. Eleven Interchangeable Treatment Heads
The ESWT-KP-B includes radial, focus, and flat treatment heads in sizes ranging from 6mm to 25mm. Radial Treatment Heads
Radial heads disperse pressure waves across a wider tissue area. Common applications include: Larger muscle groups Broad soft-tissue regions Cellulite treatments General physiotherapy programs Body-contouring applications Focus Treatment Heads
Focus heads concentrate the mechanical energy within a smaller treatment area. Common applications include: Localized treatment points Tendon attachments Small musculoskeletal areas Focused rehabilitation programs Selected ED treatment zones Flat Treatment Heads
Flat heads provide controlled contact across suitable surface areas. Common applications include: Body-texture treatments Surface-level soft-tissue applications Cellulite programs Medium-sized treatment regions General wellness treatments Adjustable Treatment Areas Upper-Body Areas
Different head sizes and pressure settings can be selected for upper-body physiotherapy and recovery programs. Common treatment areas include: Shoulder Elbow Hand and wrist Upper back Suitable arm muscles and tendons Lower-Body Areas
The treatment head and parameters can be customized according to the location and size of the lower-body treatment area. Common treatment areas include: Hip Knee Thigh Achilles tendon Foot and ankle Plantar area Body and Intimate Wellness Areas
Suitable heads and dedicated software support professionally administered body and intimate wellness protocols. Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Waist Buttocks Inner and outer thighs Legs Professionally assessed ED treatment zones Professional Treatment Applications Common Musculoskeletal Applications The ESWT-KP-B may be incorporated into professional treatment plans for suitable clients with: Tennis elbow Tendinitis and tendinopathy Plantar fasciitis Frozen shoulder Achilles tendon concerns Ankle, knee, and wrist concerns Shoulder impingement Rotator-cuff concerns Lumbar and hip discomfort Chronic musculoskeletal concerns Post-injury soft-tissue rehabilitation Professionally assessed calcification concerns Diagnosis, suitability, treatment settings, and expected outcomes should be determined by an appropriately qualified professional. How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s medical history, symptoms, diagnosis where applicable, medications, previous procedures, treatment goals, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Program and Head Selection
Select the appropriate physiotherapy, aesthetic, sports-recovery, rehabilitation, or ED program. Install the treatment head suited to the area and protocol. Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select continuous or pulse mode, pressure, frequency, preload, and total impact count. Begin with conservative settings and adjust progressively according to client response. Step 4: Shockwave Treatment
Apply suitable coupling medium when required and position the treatment head over the professionally identified area. Deliver the selected number of impacts while monitoring client comfort. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the coupling medium, inspect the area, document the treatment settings and impact count, and provide appropriate post-treatment guidance. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The ESWT-KP-B combines adjustable pneumatic shockwave technology with a compact footprint and extensive treatment-head selection. Key advantages include: Professional pneumatic ballistic shockwave technology Adjustable 0.5–6 Bar pressure Adjustable 1–21Hz frequency Continuous and pulse delivery modes Six customizable preload settings Eleven interchangeable treatment heads Radial, focus, and flat head designs Head sizes from 6mm to 25mm Upgraded ED treatment software Real-time impact counter 8-inch color touchscreen Easy projectile-replacement mechanism 200W power output Compact 58 × 46 × 38cm package CE and ISO certificates Three-year parts warranty Professional training and lifetime support Technical Specifications
What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B main unit 1 × Pneumatic ballistic treatment handpiece 4 × Radial treatment heads 4 × Focus treatment heads 3 × Flat treatment heads 11 × Total treatment heads 1 × Integrated 8-inch touchscreen Continuous and pulse treatment modes Six preload settings Real-time impact counter Upgraded ED treatment software Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Pneumatic shockwave operation training Treatment-head selection guidance Pressure and frequency adjustment guidance Physiotherapy protocol training Sports-recovery protocol training Anti-cellulite protocol training ED treatment protocol training Client-screening documentation Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every ESWT-KP-B includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use the system safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen operation Client consultation and screening Pneumatic handpiece operation Treatment-head selection Pressure and frequency adjustment Continuous and pulse modes Preload and impact-count settings Physiotherapy applications Sports-recovery applications Anti-cellulite applications ED treatment software Projectile replacement Equipment cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Treatment heads, projectiles, sealing components, and other parts subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable components, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A detailed medical consultation, professional assessment, and informed consent should be completed before treatment. The ESWT-KP-B should only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active thrombosis or blood clots Anticoagulant therapy without appropriate medical clearance Malignant tumors or known cancer in the treatment area Active skin infection Open wounds within the treatment area Severely impaired sensation Active growth plates in children Recent surgery within the treatment area Metal implants requiring medical clearance Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision Additional considerations for ED treatments include: Active penile or genital infection Active inflammation in the treatment area Penile implants or prostheses Unexplained pain, lesions, or bleeding Conditions requiring specialist medical assessment Client eligibility, diagnosis, treatment parameters, and medical clearance must be determined according to the application and applicable professional requirements. Operating Precautions Inspect the machine, handpiece, cables, and treatment heads before use. Select the correct treatment head for the application. Begin with conservative pressure and frequency settings. Increase parameters progressively according to client response. Use suitable coupling medium where required. Monitor client comfort throughout the session. Do not treat prohibited anatomical areas. Record pressure, frequency, mode, and impact count. Clean and disinfect reusable components after treatment. Replace worn projectiles and components as directed. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected or severe discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B is intended for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in: Physiotherapy clinics Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine facilities Musculoskeletal treatment practices Men’s wellness clinics Medical spas Body-contouring clinics Integrated wellness centers Qualified medical and allied-health practices Practitioners must review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering shockwave treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B?
Adjustable Pneumatic Shockwave Technology
The system provides adjustable pressure from 0.5 to 6 Bar and frequency from 1 to 21Hz for personalized professional protocols. Eleven Treatment Heads
Radial, focus, and flat heads in sizes from 6mm to 25mm support precise and broad treatment areas. Dedicated ED Treatment Software
The upgraded interface provides structured treatment-zone management, adjustable parameters, and impact tracking for professionally administered protocols. Multiple Professional Applications
One platform supports physiotherapy, sports recovery, musculoskeletal rehabilitation, cellulite treatments, body contouring, and ED programs. Complete Professional Support
The package includes clinical operation training, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the ESWT-KP-B?
The ESWT-KP-B is a professional pneumatic ballistic shockwave system that generates mechanical pressure waves through a compressor-powered treatment handpiece. How does pneumatic ballistic shockwave work?
Compressed air accelerates a projectile inside the handpiece. The projectile strikes the selected treatment head, creating pressure waves that transfer into the targeted tissue. What pressure and frequency ranges are available?
The machine provides adjustable pressure from 0.5 to 6 Bar and frequency from 1 to 21Hz. How many treatment heads are included?
The system includes eleven heads: four radial, four focus, and three flat treatment heads. What is the difference between the treatment heads?
Radial heads provide broader pressure-wave distribution, focus heads concentrate treatment on smaller areas, and flat heads provide controlled contact for suitable surface and body applications. Which treatment modes are available?
The machine includes continuous and pulse delivery modes, six preload settings, and an upgraded ED treatment interface. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the shoulder, elbow, wrist, lumbar region, hip, knee, thigh, Achilles tendon, foot, ankle, abdomen, waist, buttocks, legs, and suitable ED treatment zones. Can the machine be used for cellulite treatments?
Yes. Radial and flat treatment heads can be incorporated into professional cellulite and body-texture programs. Can it support ED treatment protocols?
Yes. The machine includes upgraded ED software and suitable treatment heads. This application should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals following screening and applicable local requirements. Is treatment uncomfortable?
Client experience varies according to the treatment area, condition, pressure, frequency, and individual sensitivity. Settings can be adjusted during the session to maintain appropriate tolerance. How many sessions are recommended?
The number and frequency of sessions depend on the application, client condition, professional assessment, and treatment protocol. Results and required course length should not be guaranteed. Can it be combined with other treatments?
It may be incorporated into a broader professional treatment plan when the combination is appropriate, compatible, and permitted within the practitioner’s scope. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers machine operation, treatment-head selection, pressure and frequency settings, treatment protocols, safety, client screening, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Pneumatic Shockwave Therapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B enables qualified clinics and wellness facilities to provide customizable pneumatic shockwave treatments using one compact professional platform. Five key benefits: Adjustable pneumatic pressure from 0.5 to 6 Bar Frequency control from 1 to 21Hz Eleven radial, focus, and flat treatment heads Dedicated ED software with continuous and pulse modes CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Range
Professional Purpose
Pressure
0.5–6 Bar
Adjustable treatment intensity
Frequency
1–21Hz
Customizable impact-delivery speed
Delivery Modes
Continuous and pulse
Different treatment patterns
Preload Settings
Six
Customizable projectile response
Treatment Heads
Eleven
Small, medium, and broad treatment areas
Impact Counter
Real-time tracking
Accurate session documentation
Display
8-inch touchscreen
Parameter and protocol management
Head Type
Available Sizes
General Application
Radial Heads
10mm, 15mm, 20mm, and 25mm
Broad soft-tissue and body-area treatments
Focus Heads
6mm, 10mm, 15mm, and 20mm
Concentrated and targeted applications
Flat Heads
10mm, 15mm, and 20mm
Controlled surface and body treatments
Total Heads
Eleven
Complete professional treatment selection
Treatment Category
Common Applications
Suggested Head Type
Physiotherapy
Musculoskeletal and soft-tissue programs
Focus or radial
Sports Recovery
Tendon, muscle, and overuse-related conditions
Protocol-dependent
Rehabilitation
Functional recovery and localized discomfort
Focus or radial
Cellulite Treatments
Cellulite appearance and body texture
Radial or flat
Body Contouring
Abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, and legs
Radial
Erectile-Function Programs
Professionally administered acoustic-wave protocols
Suitable focus head
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty ESWT-KP-B
Model
ESWT-KP-B
Technology
Pneumatic ballistic shockwave
Energy Range
0.5–6 Bar
Frequency Range
1–21Hz
Power Output
200W
Treatment Handpieces
One pneumatic ballistic handpiece
Treatment Heads
Eleven
Head Types
Radial, focus, and flat
Head Sizes
6–25mm
Radial Heads
10mm, 15mm, 20mm, and 25mm
Focus Heads
6mm, 10mm, 15mm, and 20mm
Flat Heads
10mm, 15mm, and 20mm
Display
8-inch color touchscreen
Delivery Modes
Continuous and pulse
Preload Settings
Six
ED Treatment Software
Upgraded dedicated protocol
Impact Counter
Real-time session tracking
Package Dimensions
58 × 46 × 38cm
Volume Weight
28kg
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Receives in 7 days.
$3,599.00
Professional Dual-Technology Shockwave Therapy System
Electromagnetic and Pneumatic Shockwave Technology for Multi-Application Treatments
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave C is a professional extracorporeal shockwave therapy system that combines electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic technologies on one integrated platform.
Its electromagnetic handpiece provides focused acoustic energy for precise treatment areas, while the pneumatic handpiece generates radial pressure waves for broader soft-tissue applications. Practitioners can select the appropriate technology according to the treatment area and professional protocol.
The system includes 19 treatment tips, three dedicated treatment interfaces, a 10.4-inch color touchscreen, adjustable energy and frequency settings, a built-in cooling system, and an impact counter.
Two shockwave technologies | 19 treatment tips | Three dedicated modes | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Two Professional Shockwave Technologies on One Platform Electromagnetic Shockwave Technology
The electromagnetic handpiece uses a precision magnetic-coil mechanism to generate focused acoustic energy. Its concentrated delivery is designed for smaller treatment zones and applications that require precise energy placement. Common applications include: Focused musculoskeletal treatments Tendon and soft-tissue programs Localized pain-management support Sports-injury rehabilitation Erectile-function treatment protocols Targeted physiotherapy applications Pneumatic Ballistic Shockwave Technology
The pneumatic handpiece uses compressed air to accelerate an internal projectile. The resulting impact creates radial pressure waves that disperse through a broader tissue area. Common applications include: Large soft-tissue areas Cellulite treatments Body-contouring programs Broad physiotherapy applications Muscle and connective-tissue treatments Sports-recovery programs Integrated Dual-Technology Operation
The two handpieces allow practitioners to select focused electromagnetic energy or broader pneumatic pressure waves without purchasing separate systems. This integrated configuration supports: Precise and broad treatment options Multiple professional applications Customizable treatment protocols Efficient switching between services Reduced equipment requirements Flexible clinical workflows Select the Right Treatment Mode for Each Client Erectile-Function Treatment Mode
The dedicated ED interface includes five mapped treatment zones, impact counting, round tracking, preload selection, and electromagnetic or pneumatic mode options. Recommended applications: Professional erectile-function protocols Vascular-support treatment programs Targeted acoustic-wave applications Structured multi-session treatments Recommended for: Appropriately screened adult male clients Specialist men’s wellness clinics Qualified practitioners offering ED protocols This application should only be provided within the practitioner’s permitted professional scope and according to applicable local requirements. Anti-Cellulite Treatment Mode
The anti-cellulite interface provides body-area mapping and adjustable settings for different treatment zones. Recommended applications: Cellulite appearance treatments Localized body-contouring programs Skin-texture improvement Soft-tissue stimulation Body wellness treatments Recommended for: Clients concerned about visible cellulite Clients seeking non-invasive body treatments Clinics offering structured body-care programs Physiotherapy Treatment Mode
The physiotherapy interface covers nine musculoskeletal regions and supports customizable frequency, energy, and impact settings. Recommended applications: Tendon and soft-tissue treatments Sports-injury recovery programs Chronic musculoskeletal conditions Rehabilitation support Localized pain-management programs Recommended for: Physiotherapy clients Sports and recovery clients Clients with professionally assessed musculoskeletal concerns Sports-Recovery Program
Practitioners can select the appropriate electromagnetic or pneumatic handpiece according to the size, depth, and location of the target area. Recommended applications: Tendon overuse conditions Muscle and soft-tissue recovery Shoulder, elbow, knee, and ankle programs Post-activity recovery support Recommended for: Athletes Active adults Fitness and rehabilitation clients Electromagnetic Energy and Frequency Control The electromagnetic handpiece offers adjustable focused-shockwave parameters for precise treatments. Settings should be selected according to the treatment area, professional protocol, and client response. Pneumatic Pressure and Frequency Control
The pneumatic handpiece provides adjustable radial pressure-wave settings for broader treatment areas. Nineteen Interchangeable Treatment Tips
The Dual Wave C includes seven electromagnetic heads and twelve pneumatic heads to support different treatment depths, areas, and professional applications. The exact tip should be selected according to its intended function, the treatment area, and the supplied professional protocol. Adjustable Treatment Areas Upper-Body Areas
The available heads and treatment settings support multiple upper-body physiotherapy and recovery applications. Common treatment areas include: Shoulder Elbow Hand and wrist Upper back Selected arm muscles and tendons Lower-Body Areas
Focused or radial shockwave delivery can be selected according to the size and location of the lower-body treatment area. Common treatment areas include: Hip Knee Thigh Achilles tendon Foot and ankle Plantar area Body and Intimate Wellness Areas
Dedicated interfaces and specialized treatment heads support professionally assessed body and intimate wellness applications. Common treatment areas include: Abdomen Waist Buttocks Inner and outer thighs Legs Suitable ED treatment zones Professional Treatment Applications Common Musculoskeletal Applications The Dual Wave C may be incorporated into professional protocols for suitable clients with: Tennis elbow Tendinitis and tendinopathy Plantar fasciitis Frozen shoulder Achilles tendon concerns Shoulder impingement Rotator-cuff concerns Suitable wrist and hand conditions Knee and ankle concerns Lumbar and hip discomfort Chronic musculoskeletal concerns Post-injury soft-tissue rehabilitation Treatment suitability, diagnosis, parameters, and expected outcomes must be determined by an appropriately qualified professional. How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s medical history, current symptoms, diagnosis where applicable, medications, previous procedures, treatment goals, and possible contraindications. Step 2: Treatment Mode Selection
Select the appropriate ED, anti-cellulite, or physiotherapy interface. Choose the electromagnetic or pneumatic handpiece according to the application. Step 3: Tip and Parameter Selection
Install the appropriate treatment head and select the required energy or pressure, frequency, preload, and number of impacts. Step 4: Shockwave Treatment
Apply suitable coupling medium when required and position the treatment head over the professionally identified area. Deliver the selected number of impacts while monitoring client response. Step 5: Treatment Completion
Stop the program, remove the treatment medium, inspect the area, document the settings and impact count, and provide appropriate post-treatment recommendations. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The Dual Wave C combines two shockwave technologies, specialized interfaces, and extensive treatment-head options in one clinical platform. Key advantages include: Electromagnetic and pneumatic technologies Two independent professional handpieces Seven electromagnetic treatment heads Twelve pneumatic treatment heads Nineteen treatment tips in total Three dedicated treatment interfaces Adjustable electromagnetic energy and frequency Adjustable pneumatic pressure and frequency Six preload settings 10.4-inch color touchscreen Treatment-area mapping Integrated impact counter Built-in handpiece cooling Rear-mounted storage tank 500W power consumption 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year parts warranty Professional training and lifetime support Technical Specifications
What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty Dual Wave C main unit 1 × Electromagnetic shockwave handpiece 1 × Pneumatic ballistic shockwave handpiece 7 × Electromagnetic treatment heads 12 × Pneumatic treatment heads 19 × Total treatment tips 1 × Integrated 10.4-inch touchscreen Built-in handpiece cooling system Rear-mounted storage tank Impact-counting system Region-compatible power cable Standard machine accessories Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety and maintenance instructions Dual-technology operation training Electromagnetic parameter guidance Pneumatic parameter guidance Treatment-head selection guidance ED protocol training Anti-cellulite protocol training Physiotherapy protocol training Client-screening documentation Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every Dual Wave C system includes professional operating guidance to help practitioners use both technologies safely and consistently. Training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen and interface operation Client consultation and screening Electromagnetic handpiece operation Pneumatic handpiece operation Treatment-head selection Energy, pressure, and frequency adjustment Preload and impact-count settings ED treatment interface Anti-cellulite treatment interface Physiotherapy treatment interface Equipment cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave C includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for the equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Treatment heads, projectiles, sealing components, and other parts subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable components, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications A detailed medical consultation, professional assessment, and informed consent should be completed before treatment. The Dual Wave C should only be operated by appropriately qualified professionals within their permitted scope of practice. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active thrombosis or blood clots Anticoagulant therapy without appropriate medical clearance Malignant tumors or known cancer in the treatment area Active skin infection Open wounds within the treatment area Severely impaired sensation Active growth plates in children Recent surgery within the treatment area Metal implants requiring medical clearance Serious medical conditions requiring physician supervision Additional considerations for ED treatments include: Active infection or inflammation Penile implants or prostheses Unexplained pain, lesions, or bleeding Conditions requiring specialist medical assessment Client eligibility, treatment parameters, and medical clearance must be determined according to the application and applicable professional requirements. Operating Precautions Inspect the machine, handpieces, cables, and heads before treatment. Select the correct handpiece and treatment head. Begin with conservative settings. Increase energy or pressure progressively according to response. Use appropriate coupling medium where required. Monitor client comfort throughout the session. Do not treat prohibited anatomical areas. Record treatment settings and impact counts. Clean and disinfect reusable components after treatment. Follow the supplied maintenance schedule. Stop treatment if unexpected or severe discomfort occurs. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave C is intended for appropriately qualified and trained operators working in: Physiotherapy clinics Rehabilitation centers Sports-medicine facilities Musculoskeletal treatment practices Men’s wellness clinics Medical spas Body-contouring clinics Integrated wellness centers Qualified medical and allied-health practices Practitioners must review local licensing, insurance, medical-supervision, and scope-of-practice requirements before offering shockwave treatments. Why Choose the Wikbeauty Dual Wave C?
Two Shockwave Technologies
The system combines focused electromagnetic energy and radial pneumatic pressure waves, supporting precise and broad-area applications on one platform. Nineteen Treatment Tips
Seven electromagnetic heads and twelve pneumatic heads provide extensive treatment flexibility for different anatomical areas and professional protocols. Three Dedicated Interfaces
Separate ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy modes streamline parameter selection, body-area mapping, impact counting, and treatment documentation. Customizable Professional Settings
Adjustable energy, pressure, frequency, preload, and impact settings allow professionals to personalize each session. Complete Professional Support
The package includes dual-technology training, protocol guidance, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the Dual Wave C?
The Dual Wave C is a professional ESWT system that combines electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave technologies on one platform. What is the difference between the two handpieces?
The electromagnetic handpiece generates focused acoustic energy for precise treatment areas. The pneumatic handpiece creates radial pressure waves for broader soft-tissue areas. How many treatment tips are included?
The system includes 19 tips: seven electromagnetic heads and twelve pneumatic heads. Which treatment modes are available?
The touchscreen provides three dedicated interfaces for ED treatments, anti-cellulite programs, and physiotherapy applications. What settings are available for the electromagnetic handpiece?
The electromagnetic handpiece provides an energy range of 5–200mJ and a frequency range of 1–16Hz. What settings are available for the pneumatic handpiece?
The pneumatic handpiece provides a pressure range of 1–6 Bar and a frequency range of 1–21Hz. Which areas can be treated?
Supported areas include the shoulder, elbow, wrist, lumbar area, hip, knee, foot, ankle, abdomen, waist, buttocks, thighs, legs, and suitable intimate wellness treatment zones. Can the machine support ED treatment protocols?
Yes. It includes a dedicated ED interface and two specialized electromagnetic heads. This application should only be provided by appropriately qualified professionals following screening and applicable local requirements. Can it be used for cellulite treatments?
Yes. The pneumatic handpiece and dedicated anti-cellulite interface support body-mapped cellulite and skin-texture programs. Is treatment uncomfortable?
Client experience varies by treatment area, condition, energy level, and individual sensitivity. Intensity can be adjusted during treatment to maintain appropriate tolerance. How many sessions are recommended?
The number and frequency of sessions depend on the application, client condition, professional assessment, and selected protocol. Treatment plans should be personalized rather than guaranteed. Can both handpieces operate simultaneously?
The supplied configuration includes two independent handpieces and supports dual-handpiece operation. Actual use should follow the operating manual and selected professional protocol. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is professional training included?
Yes. Training covers both shockwave technologies, the three treatment interfaces, treatment-head selection, parameter adjustment, client screening, safety, maintenance, and troubleshooting. Add Dual-Technology Shockwave Therapy to Your Practice
The Wikbeauty Dual Wave C enables qualified clinics and wellness facilities to provide electromagnetic and pneumatic shockwave treatments using one professional platform. Five key benefits: Electromagnetic and pneumatic shockwave technologies Nineteen treatment tips for precise and broad applications Dedicated ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy interfaces Adjustable energy, pressure, frequency, and impact settings CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package details, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Range
Professional Purpose
Energy
5–200mJ
Adjustable focused acoustic output
Frequency
1–16Hz
Customizable pulse-delivery speed
Treatment Heads
Seven
Different focused applications
ED-Specific Heads
Two
Dedicated professional protocols
Preload Settings
Six
Customizable treatment response
Monitoring
Handpiece-mounted display
Real-time setting observation
Cooling
Built-in cooling fan
Supports continued operation
Setting
Available Range
Professional Purpose
Pressure
1–6 Bar
Adjustable radial-wave intensity
Frequency
1–21Hz
Customizable impact speed
Treatment Heads
Twelve
Broad treatment versatility
Head Types
Focus, radial, and flat
Different pressure-wave distributions
Head Diameters
6–25mm
Small and large treatment zones
Tip Changing
Easy-change mechanism
Efficient treatment preparation
Mechanism
Compressed-air ballistic
Radial pressure-wave generation
Tip Group
Quantity
Primary Applications
Electromagnetic Heads
Seven
Precise and focused treatment zones
ED-Specific Heads
Two of the seven electromagnetic heads
Professional erectile-function protocols
Pneumatic Focus Heads
Included within the twelve pneumatic heads
Concentrated radial treatment
Pneumatic Radial Heads
Included within the twelve pneumatic heads
General soft-tissue treatment
Pneumatic Flat Heads
Included within the twelve pneumatic heads
Broader surface coverage
Total Treatment Tips
Nineteen
Multi-application clinical coverage
Treatment Category
Common Applications
Recommended Technology
Erectile-Function Programs
Professionally assessed vascular-support protocols
Electromagnetic or protocol-selected mode
Cellulite Treatments
Body texture and cellulite appearance
Pneumatic radial
Physiotherapy
Musculoskeletal and soft-tissue conditions
Electromagnetic or pneumatic
Sports Recovery
Muscle, tendon, and activity-related recovery
Protocol-dependent
Musculoskeletal Rehabilitation
Functional recovery and localized pain support
Focused or radial shockwave
Body Contouring
Abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, and legs
Pneumatic radial
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty Dual Wave C
Model
ESWT-DOUBLE-C
Technology
Electromagnetic and pneumatic ballistic shockwave
Input Voltage
AC 110V or 220V
Power Consumption
500W
Display
10.4-inch color touchscreen
Treatment Handpieces
Two: electromagnetic and pneumatic
Treatment Modes
ED, anti-cellulite, and physiotherapy
Electromagnetic Frequency
1–16Hz
Electromagnetic Energy
5–200mJ
Electromagnetic Heads
Seven, including two ED-specific heads
Pneumatic Frequency
1–21Hz
Pneumatic Pressure
1–6 Bar
Pneumatic Heads
Twelve
Pneumatic Head Types
Focus, radial, and flat
Pneumatic Head Diameters
6–25mm
Total Treatment Tips
Nineteen
Preload Settings
Six
Special Features
Cooling system, storage tank, and impact counter
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and lifetime technical support
Receives in 7 days.
From $2,699.00
Professional EMS Muscle-Toning and Body-Contouring System
Non-Invasive Electrical Muscle Stimulation for Targeted Body Sculpting
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine is a professional body-contouring system designed to support muscle conditioning, body toning, and improved definition across multiple treatment areas.
Electrical Muscle Stimulation technology delivers controlled electrical impulses to targeted muscles, producing repeated involuntary contractions. These contractions help activate muscle fibers and support structured muscle-toning programs without conventional weight training during treatment.
With multiple treatment applicators, adjustable intensity levels, a clear LCD interface, and portable construction, the system can be used for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves.
EMS muscle stimulation | Multiple applicators | Adjustable intensity | CE and ISO certificates | Three-year warranty
Three Professional Functions on One Platform Electrical Muscle Stimulation
EMS technology sends controlled electrical impulses through the treatment applicators and into targeted muscles. These impulses generate repeated involuntary contractions throughout the selected program. Common applications include: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock toning Thigh muscle stimulation Upper-arm definition Calf muscle conditioning General body-toning programs Targeted Body Contouring
Applicators can be positioned over specific muscle groups, enabling practitioners to create personalized treatments according to the client’s body-contouring objectives. Common applications include: Waistline definition Abdominal contouring Buttock shaping Inner- and outer-thigh toning Upper-arm contouring Lower-leg definition Adjustable Muscle-Conditioning Programs
Intensity can be adjusted from Level 1 to Level 10 according to the selected area and client comfort. This enables practitioners to begin at a lower setting and increase the stimulation progressively. Common benefits include: Personalized treatment intensity Progressive muscle activation Different settings for different body areas Improved client comfort Structured multi-session programs Select the Right Program for Each Client Muscle-Conditioning Program
Designed to focus on repeated muscle activation and improved muscle tone in a selected area. Recommended applications: Abdominal muscle conditioning Buttock toning Arm muscle stimulation Thigh and calf conditioning Recommended for: Clients seeking improved muscle definition Clients supplementing regular fitness activities Clients interested in assisted muscle stimulation Body-Contouring Program
Focuses on improving the appearance and definition of selected body areas through targeted EMS treatments. Recommended applications: Waistline contouring Buttock shaping Inner-thigh toning Outer-thigh contouring Upper-arm definition Recommended for: Clients concerned about reduced muscle tone Clients seeking a firmer-looking silhouette Clients following an active and balanced lifestyle Multi-Area Sculpting Program
Allows practitioners to create a structured plan covering several body areas over a series of sessions. Recommended applications: Abdomen and buttocks Abdomen and thighs Arms and abdomen Thighs and calves Complete body-toning packages Recommended for: Clients with several treatment objectives Clients seeking comprehensive body conditioning Professional clinics offering treatment packages Maintenance Program
Designed to help clients continue their muscle-conditioning routine after completing an initial treatment course. Recommended applications: Muscle-tone maintenance Body-contour maintenance Seasonal body-shaping programs Continued fitness and wellness support Recommended for: Returning EMS clients Clients who have completed six to eight sessions Clients combining treatment with regular exercise Adjustable Intensity and Treatment Settings The EMS Sculpting Machine allows treatment intensity to be customized according to the body area, selected protocol, and client comfort. Treatment settings should always be selected according to user suitability, individual tolerance, and the supplied operating instructions. Adjustable Treatment Areas Abdomen and Waist
The applicators can be positioned over the abdominal muscles to support muscle conditioning and midsection definition. Common treatment objectives include: Abdominal muscle stimulation Core-area conditioning Waistline definition Improved abdominal tone Buttocks and Thighs
Treatments can be customized for the buttocks, inner thighs, outer thighs, and other suitable areas of the legs. Common treatment objectives include: Buttock toning and shaping Inner-thigh muscle conditioning Outer-thigh contouring Lower-body definition Arms and Calves
The system can also support targeted muscle stimulation for smaller treatment areas. Common treatment objectives include: Biceps stimulation Triceps conditioning Upper-arm definition Calf muscle toning Professional Body-Sculpting Applications How a Professional Session Works Step 1: Client Consultation
Review the client’s health history, treatment goals, target areas, and possible contraindications. Explain the expected muscle-contraction sensation and establish realistic treatment objectives. Step 2: Applicator Placement
Choose the appropriate applicators and position them securely over the selected muscle groups. Ensure correct skin contact and avoid prohibited treatment areas. Step 3: Personalized Settings
Select the appropriate stimulation frequency, intensity, and session duration. Begin at a low intensity and increase it progressively according to the client’s comfort and muscle response. Step 4: EMS Treatment
The system delivers controlled electrical impulses for approximately 30 minutes. The client experiences repeated muscle contractions within the selected treatment area. Step 5: Treatment Completion
The system completes the selected program, and the applicators are removed. Inspect the treatment area and provide any appropriate post-treatment recommendations. Designed for Professional and Personal Treatment Environments
The EMS Sculpting Machine combines customizable body-toning functions with straightforward operation and portable construction. Key advantages include: Professional Electrical Muscle Stimulation technology Multiple body-treatment applicators Adjustable stimulation frequency Ten adjustable intensity levels Treatments for five or more body areas Clear LCD control interface Automatic shut-off Skin-contact sensors Overload protection Lightweight, portable construction 110V and 220V compatibility CE and ISO certificates Three-year parts warranty Customer training and technical support Technical Specifications
What Is Included? Standard Equipment
1 × Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine Multiple EMS treatment applicators Applicator connection cables Adjustable intensity controls Integrated LCD control interface Standard machine accessories 1 × Region-compatible power cable The final number and configuration of treatment applicators should follow the selected product package. Documentation and Training
English user manual Installation and operating guide Safety instructions Applicator-placement guidance Muscle-conditioning protocols Body-contouring protocol guidance Client consultation materials Cleaning and maintenance guidance Professional training certificate Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Every EMS Sculpting Machine includes operating guidance to help professionals and approved users operate the system correctly. Training covers: Machine installation and setup LCD interface operation Client consultation and screening Treatment-area selection Correct applicator placement Stimulation-frequency adjustment Intensity-level selection Muscle-conditioning protocols Safety procedures and contraindications Applicator cleaning and maintenance Basic troubleshooting Ongoing technical assistance is available by email, telephone, and WhatsApp. Three-Year Warranty
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine includes a three-year professional parts warranty, providing dependable after-sales protection for your equipment. Warranty Coverage
The warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects and covered machine components under normal operating conditions. Technical guidance, troubleshooting assistance, and replacement-part coordination are available throughout the warranty period. Consumable accessories and components subject to normal wear are not covered unless otherwise stated in the final order agreement. Technical Support Process
Contact the Wikbeauty technical support team. Provide the machine model and order information. Describe the issue and provide photographs or video when requested. A technician will assess the reported issue remotely. Operating guidance or eligible replacement parts will be arranged. Continued assistance will be provided until the reported issue is addressed. Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not cover normal wear, consumable accessories, damage caused by incorrect operation, unauthorized repair, accidental impact, unsuitable electrical supply, improper maintenance, liquid exposure, misuse, or failure to follow the operating manual. Safety and Contraindications
A client consultation and health-history review should be completed before professional treatment. The machine must be operated according to the supplied instructions. Treatment may not be suitable for users with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants within the treatment area Active skin infection Open wounds within the treatment area Recent surgery in the selected area Serious cardiovascular conditions Neurological conditions affecting sensation Severe skin sensitivity Medical conditions affected by electrical stimulation Do not position applicators over the heart, head, front or side of the neck, spine, broken skin, or other prohibited areas identified in the operating manual. Users with medical concerns should consult an appropriate healthcare professional before beginning treatment. Operating Precautions Begin every new treatment at a low intensity. Increase the intensity gradually according to comfort. Ensure correct applicator contact before activation. Do not place applicators over prohibited body areas. Inspect applicators and cables before every session. Clean the applicators between professional clients. Keep the machine in a clean, dry environment. Stop treatment if unusual pain or discomfort occurs. Follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions. Intended Professional Users
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine is suitable for appropriately trained operators working in: Beauty salons Body-contouring studios Wellness centers Fitness and recovery facilities Professional spas Home-based beauty businesses Aesthetic treatment facilities The machine may also be suitable for personal use when operated according to the supplied manual. Professional services must comply with applicable local licensing, insurance, and operating requirements. Why Choose the Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine?
Targeted Muscle Stimulation
EMS technology delivers controlled electrical impulses to selected muscle groups, supporting structured muscle-conditioning and toning programs. Adjustable Intensity Levels
Ten intensity levels allow users to begin comfortably and increase muscle stimulation progressively according to individual tolerance. Multiple Treatment Areas
One system can support treatments for the abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves using suitable applicator placement. Portable and Easy to Operate
The lightweight design, clear LCD interface, and straightforward controls make the system suitable for professional facilities and approved personal use. Complete Professional Support
The package includes operating guidance, training, technical assistance, CE and ISO certificates, and a three-year parts warranty. Frequently Asked Questions
What is the EMS Sculpting Machine?
It is an Electrical Muscle Stimulation system that delivers controlled electrical impulses to targeted muscles for body-toning and muscle-conditioning programs. How long does one session take?
A standard treatment session takes approximately 30 minutes, depending on the selected body area and treatment protocol. Which areas can be treated?
Common areas include the abdomen, buttocks, inner and outer thighs, biceps, triceps, and calves. How many sessions are recommended?
The supplied protocol recommends six to eight sessions, commonly scheduled twice per week. The final course should be personalized according to individual suitability and objectives. What does EMS treatment feel like?
Users typically experience repeated muscle contractions, tingling, or pulsing sensations. The intensity can be adjusted from Level 1 to Level 10 according to comfort. Does the machine have adjustable intensity?
Yes. The system provides ten adjustable intensity levels and customizable stimulation-frequency settings. Is the treatment invasive?
No. The system uses external applicators and does not require injections, incisions, or surgery. Can EMS replace regular exercise?
EMS treatments should complement rather than replace regular physical activity, balanced nutrition, and healthy lifestyle habits. Can the machine directly remove fat?
The primary function of the system is electrical muscle stimulation. Improved muscle tone may support a more defined appearance, but individual body-composition changes vary and should not be guaranteed. Can it be used at home?
The supplied information indicates suitability for home use. Users must follow the operating manual, observe all contraindications, and begin at a low intensity. Are results the same for every user?
No. Results vary according to the treatment area, selected intensity, number of sessions, muscle condition, lifestyle, and individual response. What certificates are included?
The system includes CE and ISO certificates. What warranty is included?
The machine includes a three-year parts warranty with technical support and replacement-part coordination for eligible covered issues. Is training included?
Yes. Machine operation, applicator placement, intensity adjustment, safety instructions, cleaning, maintenance, and technical support are included. Add Professional EMS Body Sculpting to Your Business
The Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine enables salons, wellness centers, fitness facilities, and body-contouring professionals to introduce customizable muscle-conditioning and body-toning services. Five key benefits: Targeted Electrical Muscle Stimulation technology Multiple applicators for five or more body areas Ten adjustable intensity levels Portable design with a clear LCD interface CE and ISO certificates with a three-year warranty Contact Wikbeauty for product pricing, package configuration, delivery information, professional training, and purchasing support.
Setting
Available Configuration
Professional Purpose
Intensity Levels
1–10
Progressive, comfort-based muscle stimulation
Stimulation Frequency
Adjustable
Customizable treatment protocols
Treatment Applicators
Multiple
Treatments for different muscle groups
Session Duration
Approximately 30 minutes
Efficient professional or personal use
Recommended Course
Six to eight sessions
Structured muscle-conditioning program
Treatment Frequency
Commonly twice weekly
Progressive treatment planning
Control System
LCD interface
Simple setting and program management
Treatment Area
Primary Objective
Suitable Program
Abdomen
Muscle conditioning and midsection definition
Muscle-conditioning program
Waist
Improve the appearance of body contours
Body-contouring program
Buttocks
Toning and shape enhancement
Muscle or multi-area program
Inner Thighs
Muscle conditioning and leg definition
Body-contouring program
Outer Thighs
Hip and thigh contouring
Multi-area program
Upper Arms
Biceps and triceps stimulation
Muscle-conditioning program
Calves
Lower-leg muscle conditioning
Muscle-conditioning program
Specification
Details
Product Name
Wikbeauty EMS Sculpting Machine
Technology
Electrical Muscle Stimulation
Stimulation Frequency
Adjustable
Intensity Levels
Levels 1–10
Treatment Applicators
Multiple applicators for different body areas
Session Duration
Approximately 30 minutes
Recommended Course
Six to eight sessions
Recommended Frequency
Commonly two sessions per week
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, buttocks, thighs, arms, and calves
Display
Clear LCD control interface
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, skin-contact sensors, and overload protection
Power Input
AC 110V or 220V
Design
Lightweight and portable
Suitable Environments
Salons, wellness centers, fitness facilities, and home use
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Customer training and technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$3,999.00
Professional 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation System
Ultrasonic Cavitation and Radiofrequency for Body Contouring
The 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine is a multifunctional body-contouring platform developed for beauty salons, aesthetic spas, wellness clinics and professional body-sculpting studios.
The system combines ultrasonic cavitation, radiofrequency and four complementary treatment functions for customized body-contouring, skin-firming, cellulite-appearance and body-care programs.
Multiple treatment applicators and adjustable intensity settings allow trained practitioners to create protocols for the abdomen, thighs, buttocks, upper arms, hips, back, waist and suitable face and neck areas.
Six treatment functions | Ultrasonic cavitation | Radiofrequency | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Applications on One Body-Contouring Platform Ultrasonic Cavitation
The Cavitation Handle delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable localized body areas. Common applications include: Abdomen treatments Waist and flank programs Thigh treatments Upper-arm programs Hip and back treatments General body-contouring services Radiofrequency Skin Firming
The RF function delivers controlled thermal energy for professional skin-firming and texture-refinement programs. Common applications include: Loose-looking body skin Skin-firming support Cellulite-appearance programs Abdomen and thigh treatments Suitable facial protocols General rejuvenation services Cellulite-Appearance and Texture Care
The system’s combined technologies can be incorporated into professional programs for uneven-looking body texture. Common applications include: Inner thighs Outer thighs Buttocks Hips Abdomen Other professionally assessed body areas Circulation and Drainage Support
Complementary treatment functions support professionally planned massage and circulation-focused body-care programs. Common applications include: Temporary water-retention support Post-cavitation massage General circulation-focused wellness Body-care treatments Muscle relaxation Maintenance-oriented programs The appropriate technology, applicator, energy level and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client
The system supports customized body-contouring pathways using one or more of its six functions. Program 1: Abdomen and Waist Contouring
A body-focused program for suitable localized areas around the abdomen and waist. Recommended technologies: Ultrasonic Cavitation Radiofrequency Complementary Body-Care Functions Post-Treatment Massage Recommended for: Upper abdomen Lower abdomen Waistline Flanks and side body Program 2: Thigh and Cellulite Appearance
A lower-body program designed for suitable inner- and outer-thigh concerns. Recommended technologies: Ultrasonic Cavitation Radiofrequency Texture-Refinement Function Circulation-Support Treatment Recommended for: Inner thighs Outer thighs Buttocks Cellulite-appearance programs Program 3: Arms, Back and Hips
A customizable program for smaller or contoured body zones. Recommended technologies: Suitable Cavitation Applicator Radiofrequency Complementary Massage Function Customized Lower-Intensity Settings Recommended for: Upper arms Upper and lower back Hips Bra-line areas Program 4: Face and Neck Firming
A gentler professional program using applicators and settings intended for suitable facial and neck areas. Recommended technologies: Suitable RF Applicator Gentle Skin-Firming Program Customized Low-Intensity Settings Professional Facial Protocol Recommended for: Facial-contour refinement Jawline treatments Suitable neck areas General skin-firming support Adjustable Energy for Customized Treatments
The 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation System provides adjustable intensity settings for different technologies and treatment areas. The adjustable controls give trained practitioners greater flexibility over cavitation energy, RF intensity and client comfort. New clients should begin with conservative settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
The system supports professional treatment of multiple body and facial zones. Upper-Body Treatments
Upper arms Upper back Lower back Bra-line areas Waist Flanks Lower-Body Treatments
Abdomen Hips Buttocks Inner thighs Outer thighs Legs Face and Neck Treatments
Suitable cheek areas Jawline Lower face Appropriate neck areas Other professionally assessed facial zones Professional Body and Facial Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected technology, applicator, energy setting and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s health history, treatment goals, body condition, target areas and contraindications. 2. Technology and Applicator Selection
The appropriate treatment applicators are selected according to the treatment area and intended body-contouring program. 3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the cavitation intensity, RF energy and other available settings according to the client’s tolerance and professional protocol. 4. Multi-Technology Treatment
The selected technologies are applied in the appropriate sequence. A typical professional treatment lasts approximately 60 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the areas are assessed and the client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, warmth, tenderness, tingling or sensitivity may occur depending on the selected technology and intensity. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines six treatment functions with digital controls and multiple applicators for streamlined professional operation. Key operating advantages include: Ultrasonic Cavitation Radiofrequency Skin Firming Six integrated treatment functions Multiple treatment applicators Adjustable intensity levels LCD control interface Preset treatment modes Dual-voltage compatibility Technical Specifications
What Is Included?
The package includes the main control system, treatment applicators and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation main unit Ultrasonic Cavitation Handle Radiofrequency Treatment Handle Complementary treatment applicators Handle-connection components Required treatment accessories Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Treatment-handle setup Cavitation operation RF-energy selection Treatment-area guidance Multi-technology sequencing Client consultation guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup LCD control operation Treatment-handle installation Ultrasonic Cavitation operation Radiofrequency settings Applicator selection Body-area assessment Face and neck precautions Multi-technology treatment sequencing Client-comfort monitoring Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components LCD control system Cavitation-generation components Radiofrequency components Original treatment handles Handle and cable connections Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-handle operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of accessories and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional cavitation and radiofrequency equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in or near the treatment area Active cancer Active or suspected blood clots Severe cardiovascular or vascular conditions Open wounds or active skin infections Severe liver or kidney conditions Bleeding disorders Uncontrolled diabetes Recent surgery Reduced sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Cavitation must not be applied over the head, heart, breasts, kidneys, liver, reproductive organs, bone surfaces or other prohibited areas. RF energy and cavitation intensity must be selected according to the treatment area, skin condition and client tolerance. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Professional spas Aesthetic clinics Wellness centers Body-contouring studios Trained independent practitioners Qualified aesthetic professionals Businesses expanding their body-treatment services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine? Combine Six Treatment Functions
The system combines ultrasonic cavitation, radiofrequency and four complementary body-care functions in one professional platform. Treat Multiple Body Areas
Multiple applicators support professional protocols for the abdomen, thighs, buttocks, arms, hips, back, waist and suitable facial areas. Customize Every Session
Adjustable intensity and technology selection allow treatments to be adapted to the client’s condition and professional objectives. Expand Your Service Menu
The machine supports body-contouring, skin-firming, cellulite-appearance, texture-refinement and suitable face and neck programs. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and customer support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does ultrasonic cavitation work?
The Cavitation Handle delivers ultrasonic energy to suitable localized body areas for professionally planned contour-refinement programs. How does radiofrequency complement cavitation?
Radiofrequency provides controlled thermal energy for skin-firming support and texture-refinement treatments. What makes this a six-in-one system?
The machine combines ultrasonic cavitation, radiofrequency and four complementary professional body-care functions. Which areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the abdomen, waist, flanks, thighs, buttocks, upper arms, back, hips and selected face or neck areas using appropriate applicators. How long does a session take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 60 minutes. Treatment duration varies according to the number of areas and technologies selected. How many sessions are recommended?
A typical professional treatment course may include approximately 8–12 sessions. The final number and interval depend on client condition, treatment area and professional assessment. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Clients may feel vibration or an audible tone during cavitation and warmth during RF treatment. Settings should remain within the client’s comfort level. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary redness, warmth, tenderness or sensitivity may occur. Are results permanent?
No permanent body-contouring outcome should be guaranteed. Results vary, and remaining fat cells can change size with future weight gain. Is professional training included?
Professional training covers cavitation, RF, applicator selection, treatment sequencing, cleaning, maintenance and safety. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add 6-in-1 Cavitation to Your Body-Contouring Business
The 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine combines: Ultrasonic Cavitation Radiofrequency Skin Firming Six integrated treatment functions Professional body and facial applications Three-year parts warranty and customer support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its treatment functions, applicators and professional training. Order Your 6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine and Request Pricing
Treatment Setting
Recommended Application
Lower Intensity
First-time clients and smaller treatment areas
Moderate Intensity
General professional body-contouring treatments
Higher Intensity
Appropriately selected body areas and experienced clients
Customized Program
Technology-specific settings based on professional assessment
Treatment Area
Applicable Technology
Intended Aesthetic Application
Abdomen
Cavitation and RF
Body-contour refinement
Waist and flanks
Cavitation and RF
Waist-contouring support
Inner and outer thighs
Cavitation and RF
Lower-body and texture care
Buttocks
RF and complementary functions
Firming and cellulite-appearance support
Upper arms
Cavitation or RF
Targeted body-care programs
Back and hips
Cavitation and RF
Localized contour refinement
Face and jawline
Suitable RF Applicator
Facial-contour programs
Neck
Suitable RF Applicator
Professional firming support
Specification
Details
Product Name
6-in-1 Spiral Cavitation Machine
Product Type
Professional multifunctional body-contouring system
Number of Functions
Six
Primary Technologies
Ultrasonic Cavitation and Radiofrequency
Additional Functions
Four complementary body-care modalities
Treatment Applicators
Multiple heads for different body areas and functions
Session Duration
Approximately 60 minutes
Treatment Areas
Abdomen, thighs, buttocks, arms, hips, back, waist, face and neck
Intensity Levels
Adjustable
Control Interface
LCD screen with professional controls
Power Supply
110V and 220V
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, client-safety sensors and overload protection
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and customer assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Receives in 7 days.
$2,499.00
Professional 17-in-1 Facial Care System
Seventeen Technologies for Customized Facial and Skin-Care Treatments
The 17-in-1 Facial Care Machine is a multifunctional professional platform developed for beauty salons, medical spas, skin-care clinics, dermatology centers and beauty academies.
The system combines 17 facial technologies for cleansing, exfoliation, hydration, blackhead-removal support, skin firming, product application, acne-prone skin care and facial rejuvenation.
Its modern touchscreen, interchangeable treatment heads, adjustable professional settings and wheeled trolley design allow practitioners to create customized protocols for different skin types and concerns.
Seventeen facial technologies | Multiple treatment heads | Professional touchscreen | Three-year warranty
Seventeen Technologies on One Professional Platform Skin Scrubber
The Skin Scrubber uses ultrasonic vibration to support surface cleansing and removal of loosened skin debris. Common applications include: Pore cleansing Surface exfoliation Oil and debris removal Skin-care preparation Oily-skin programs General facial cleansing Oxygen Bubble
The Oxygen Bubble function supports professional cleansing, refreshing and hydration-focused facial programs. Common applications include: Skin refreshing Gentle surface cleansing Hydration support Dull-looking skin Facial preparation General skin conditioning Bipolar RF
The Bipolar RF Handle delivers controlled radiofrequency energy for professional skin-firming programs. Common applications include: Skin-firming support Fine-line appearance Mature-looking skin Facial rejuvenation Elasticity-focused treatments General anti-aging services Bubble Cleaning
The Bubble Cleaning function provides a foaming facial-cleansing treatment for suitable skin types. Common applications include: Deep-cleansing programs Congested-looking skin Oily-skin care Pore-care treatments Facial preparation General skin purification High-Pressure Spray
The High-Pressure Spray Handle produces a fine liquid mist for hydration and cosmetic-solution application. Common applications include: Skin hydration Cooling and refreshing Facial-solution application Dull-looking complexion Post-cleansing care General skin conditioning Diamond Microdermabrasion
Diamond Microdermabrasion provides controlled mechanical exfoliation using interchangeable diamond tips. Common applications include: Surface skin polishing Uneven-looking texture Rough-looking skin Dull complexion Facial preparation Professional exfoliation Ultrasonic Therapy
The Ultrasonic Handle supports professional facial massage and cosmetic-product application. Common applications include: Product-application support Facial massage Hydration treatments Skin-conditioning programs General rejuvenation Customized facial services Plasma Technology
The Plasma Handle supports professionally planned skin-conditioning and rejuvenation protocols. Common applications include: General skin rejuvenation Texture-refinement programs Acne-prone skin care Dull-looking complexion Localized facial treatments Customized professional services Microcurrent V-Face
The Microcurrent V-Face Handle provides controlled electrical stimulation for suitable facial areas. Common applications include: Facial-toning support Contour-refinement programs Jawline treatments Mature-looking skin General facial conditioning Professional firming services Cold Hammer
The Cold Hammer provides controlled cooling for post-treatment comfort and calming protocols. Common applications include: Cooling after facial treatments Temporary redness Skin-comfort programs Post-extraction support Pore-care finishing steps Facial-treatment completion Electric Microneedle
The Electric Microneedle creates controlled microchannels for professional skin-remodeling programs. Common applications include: Uneven-looking texture Fine-line appearance Acne-scar appearance Collagen-remodeling programs Professional skin renewal Customized rejuvenation Blackhead Removal
The Blackhead Removal Handle provides targeted vacuum suction for suitable congested facial areas. Common applications include: Blackhead-removal support T-zone cleansing Pore-care treatments Congested-looking skin Localized vacuum treatments Professional extraction protocols LED Light Therapy
The LED Handle provides selectable light programs for different professional skin-care objectives. Common applications include: Anti-aging programs Acne-prone skin care Brightening treatments Calming protocols General facial rejuvenation Post-treatment support Photon Rejuvenation
The Photon function provides additional light-based skin-care programs for suitable facial concerns. Common applications include: Dull-looking complexion General rejuvenation Mature-looking skin Brightening programs Skin-conditioning treatments Professional maintenance care Electrospray
The Electrospray function supports professional application of compatible cosmetic liquids and serums. Common applications include: Hydration support Cosmetic-solution application Skin-conditioning programs Post-cleansing care Customized facial services Maintenance treatments Color Light Masks
The Color Light Mask function provides broad facial coverage using selected light modes. Common applications include: Full-face LED programs Calming treatments Brightening services Acne-prone skin care Anti-aging protocols General facial wellness Multi-Modality Integration
The system allows practitioners to combine suitable technologies in a structured treatment sequence. Common applications include: Customized facial programs Multi-concern treatments Deep-cleansing packages Anti-aging services Hydration and brightening programs Complete professional facials The appropriate technology, treatment head, settings, products and session duration should be selected according to the client’s skin condition, sensitivity and professional protocol. Select the Right Facial Program for Each Client
The system supports customized treatment pathways using one or more of its 17 technologies. Program 1: Deep Cleansing and Pore Care
A cleansing-focused program for suitable oily, congested or blackhead-prone skin. Recommended technologies: Skin Scrubber Oxygen Bubble Bubble Cleaning Blackhead Removal Cold Hammer Recommended for: Congested-looking skin Oily-skin programs Blackhead-removal support Professional pore-care services Program 2: Hydration and Brightening
A moisture-focused program designed to support refreshed and radiant-looking skin. Recommended technologies: Oxygen Bubble High-Pressure Spray Ultrasonic Therapy Electrospray LED Light Therapy Recommended for: Dry-looking skin Dull complexion Skin-brightening services Hydration-focused facials Program 3: Anti-Aging and Firming
A rejuvenation program for mature-looking skin, fine lines and facial-contour concerns. Recommended technologies: Bipolar RF Microcurrent V-Face Electric Microneedle LED Light Therapy Photon Rejuvenation Recommended for: Mature-looking skin Fine-line appearance Skin-firming programs Professional anti-aging services Program 4: Texture and Acne-Prone Skin Care
A customized program for uneven-looking texture and suitable acne-prone skin. Recommended technologies: Diamond Microdermabrasion Skin Scrubber Plasma Technology Electric Microneedle Color Light Mask Recommended for: Uneven-looking texture Acne-prone skin Acne-scar appearance Professional skin-renewal programs Adjustable Technology Settings for Customized Treatments
The 17-in-1 Facial Care Machine provides adjustable settings for its compatible treatment technologies. The adjustable controls give trained practitioners greater flexibility over vacuum pressure, RF energy, microcurrent intensity, light mode and treatment duration. New clients should begin with conservative settings before treatment intensity is increased gradually. Adjustable Facial Treatment Areas
The treatment handles support professional care across multiple facial and upper-body skin areas. Full-Face Treatments
Forehead Cheeks Nose Chin Jawline General facial skin Delicate-Area Treatments
Suitable under-eye areas Outer eye area Upper cheeks Lip-contour area Other professionally assessed zones Neck and Upper-Body Treatments
Neck Décolletage Upper chest Suitable hand areas Other appropriate skin zones Professional Facial and Skin-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected technology, treatment head, products, intensity and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Facial Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s skin concerns, treatment history, current products, sensitivity and contraindications. The appropriate technologies are then selected. 2. System Preparation
The required handles, tips, masks and cosmetic products are installed according to the operating manual. The practitioner confirms that all connections are secure. 3. Parameter Selection
RF energy, microcurrent intensity, vacuum level, light mode, microneedling depth and other available parameters are selected according to the client’s skin condition. 4. Facial Treatment
The practitioner performs the selected facial steps in the appropriate sequence. A complete professional session generally lasts approximately 60–90 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the skin is assessed and suitable moisturizer and sunscreen are applied where appropriate. The client receives customized aftercare instructions. Temporary redness, dryness, sensitivity, tingling or mild swelling may occur depending on the selected technologies. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines 17 facial technologies with touchscreen controls and a mobile trolley design. Key operating advantages include: Seventeen professional treatment functions Multiple interchangeable heads Modern LCD touchscreen Preset treatment programs Adjustable technology settings Face, neck and décolletage applications Safety monitoring systems Professional wheeled trolley design Technical Specifications What Is Included? The package includes the main control system, professional treatment heads and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One 17-in-1 Facial Care main unit Skin Scrubber Oxygen Bubble components Bipolar RF Handle Bubble Cleaning Handle High-Pressure Spray Gun Diamond Microdermabrasion Handle and tips Ultrasonic Therapy Handle Plasma Treatment Handle Microcurrent V-Face Handle Cold Hammer Electric Microneedling Pen Blackhead-Removal Handle LED Light Therapy Handle Photon Rejuvenation components Electrospray Handle Color Light Mask Required connection components Power cable English user manual Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Treatment-handle setup Technology-selection guidance RF and microcurrent settings Vacuum and ultrasound operation Light-mode selection Microneedling guidance Customized facial protocols Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen navigation Operation of all 17 technologies Treatment-handle installation Client skin assessment Treatment-program selection RF and microcurrent adjustment Ultrasound and plasma operation Vacuum settings LED and Photon programs Microneedling operation Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The 17-in-1 Facial Care Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components LCD touchscreen Internal pumps and control components Original treatment handles Light-therapy components Handle-connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-handle operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of tips, needles, filters and consumables Damage caused by incompatible products Blockages caused by incorrect cleaning Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional facial equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete skin consultation and contraindication assessment must be completed before treatment. Treatment suitability depends on the selected technology. Some functions may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Metal implants in the facial area Active cancer Active herpes simplex Open wounds or active skin infections Severe inflammatory acne Severe sunburn Recent surgery Recent injectable treatments Recent laser treatments or chemical peels Photosensitivity or photosensitizing medication Bleeding disorders Poor wound healing Reduced skin sensation Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Microneedling tips must be handled according to professional hygiene and infection-control requirements. RF energy, microcurrent, ultrasound, plasma, vacuum, light intensity and microneedling depth must be selected according to the client’s skin condition and tolerance. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Professional spas Skin-care clinics Medical spas Dermatology centers Beauty academies Facial specialists Estheticians Trained independent practitioners This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the 17-in-1 Facial Care Machine? Access Seventeen Facial Technologies
One professional platform supports cleansing, exfoliation, hydration, RF, microcurrent, ultrasound, plasma, microneedling, vacuum and light therapy. Create Customized Facial Programs
Practitioners can combine suitable technologies for deep cleansing, hydration, anti-aging, acne-care, brightening and texture-refinement services. Treat Different Skin Types
Interchangeable heads and adjustable settings support customized protocols for sensitive, normal, oily, combination and large-pore skin. Improve Professional Workflow
The touchscreen interface, preset programs and mobile trolley design support organized and efficient treatments. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What technologies are included?
The system includes Skin Scrubbing, Oxygen Bubble, Bipolar RF, Bubble Cleaning, High-Pressure Spray, Diamond Microdermabrasion, Ultrasound, Plasma, Microcurrent V-Face, Cold Hammer, Electric Microneedling, Blackhead Removal, LED, Photon Rejuvenation, Electrospray, Color Light Masks and Multi-Modality Integration. How long does a professional facial take?
A typical complete facial lasts approximately 60–90 minutes. The duration depends on the selected technologies and client concerns. Can treatments be customized?
Yes. Practitioners can select and combine appropriate technologies according to the client’s skin type, sensitivity and treatment objectives. Is the system suitable for sensitive skin?
Gentler heads and lower settings can be selected for some sensitive-skin clients. Every client still requires a professional assessment before treatment. Can the system support acne and blackhead treatments?
The Skin Scrubber, Bubble Cleaning, Blackhead Removal and suitable LED or Plasma functions can be incorporated into professional clarifying and pore-care protocols. What is the difference between RF and microcurrent?
RF delivers controlled thermal energy for skin-firming support. Microcurrent provides low-level electrical stimulation for professional facial-toning programs. Is there downtime?
Recovery depends on the selected technologies and treatment intensity. Temporary redness, dryness, sensitivity or mild swelling may occur. Is professional training included?
Professional training covers machine setup, all 17 technologies, treatment programs, safety, cleaning and maintenance. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Complete 17-in-1 Facial Care to Your Business
The 17-in-1 Facial Care Machine combines: Seventeen professional treatment technologies Multiple interchangeable treatment heads A modern touchscreen and mobile trolley Customizable facial and skin-care programs Three-year parts warranty and professional support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its treatment technologies, package contents and professional training. Order Your 17-in-1 Facial Care Machine and Request Pricing
Treatment Setting
Recommended Application
Gentle Setting
Sensitive-looking skin and first-time clients
Standard Setting
General professional facial treatments
Advanced Setting
Appropriately selected intensive protocols
Customized Setting
Technology-specific programs based on professional assessment
Skin Concern
Applicable Technology
Intended Skin-Care Application
Congested-looking skin
Scrubber, Bubble and Vacuum
Deep-cleansing support
Blackheads and visible pores
Blackhead Removal and Cold Hammer
Pore-care programs
Dry-looking skin
Oxygen, Spray and Electrospray
Hydration-focused care
Fine-line appearance
RF, Microcurrent or Microneedle
Anti-aging support
Acne-prone skin
Plasma, LED and High-Frequency protocols
Clarifying skin care
Dull-looking complexion
Photon, LED and Spray
Brightening programs
Uneven-looking texture
Diamond or Microneedle
Surface-refinement programs
Temporary post-treatment redness
Cold Hammer
Cooling and comfort support
Specification
Details
Product Name
17-in-1 Facial Care Machine
Product Type
Professional multifunctional facial system
Number of Technologies
17
Primary Technologies
Cleansing, RF, microcurrent, ultrasound, plasma, microneedling, vacuum and LED
Treatment Heads
Multiple interchangeable professional heads
Skin Programs
Sensitive, normal, oily, combination, large-pore and blackhead-focused protocols
Display Interface
Modern LCD touchscreen
Session Duration
Approximately 60–90 minutes
Treatment Areas
Face, neck and décolletage
Power Supply
110V and 220V
Design
Professional wheeled trolley
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, temperature sensors, overload protection and adjustable intensity
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and technical assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Receives in 7 days.
$1,349.00
Professional Vibration Massage and Body Wellness System
Five Massage Heads for Customized Relaxation and Body-Care Treatments
The Vibration Massage Slimming Machine is a professional massage and wellness platform developed for beauty salons, spas, body-contouring studios and wellness clinics.
The system combines adjustable vibration and percussion therapy with five interchangeable massage heads. An optional 40K vacuum-heating function supports additional professional body-care and contouring programs.
Its digital controls, ergonomic treatment handpiece and portable wheeled design allow trained operators to customize treatments for the arms, thighs, abdomen, legs, back, neck and shoulders.
Vibration and percussion therapy | Five massage heads | Optional 40K vacuum heating | Three-year warranty
Six Professional Functions on One Massage Platform Vibration Massage
The vibration function delivers rapid mechanical movements to suitable muscles and body tissue. Common applications include: General body massage Muscle relaxation Tired-muscle treatments Body-wellness programs Post-workout support Maintenance-oriented massage Percussion Therapy
The percussion function provides controlled repetitive movement for professional massage and recovery programs. Common applications include: Localized muscle tension Larger muscle groups Back and shoulder treatments Thigh and leg massage Fitness-recovery programs General relaxation Circulation and Drainage Support
Mechanical vibration can be incorporated into professionally planned circulation and fluid-movement programs. Common applications include: Tired-leg treatments General circulation support Temporary water-retention programs Body-care services Post-treatment massage Wellness-maintenance sessions Optional 40K Vacuum Heating
The optional 40K vacuum-heating configuration combines suction and controlled warmth with the base massage platform. Common applications include: Cellulite-appearance programs Body-contour refinement Skin-firming support Abdomen and thigh treatments Circulation-focused body care Combination contouring services The appropriate treatment head, vibration intensity, vacuum level, temperature and session duration should be selected according to the treatment area, client condition and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client The system supports customizable massage, recovery and body-care programs. Program 1: Relaxation and Wellness
A comfort-focused vibration program for general body massage and relaxation. Recommended applications: General relaxation Stress-relief programs Tired-muscle massage Maintenance-oriented wellness Recommended for: Spa clients Fatigued professionals First-time clients General wellness programs Program 2: Muscle Recovery
A percussion-focused program for suitable muscle groups and post-workout support. Recommended applications: Back and shoulder massage Thigh and leg treatments Post-workout recovery Localized muscle tension Recommended for: Fitness enthusiasts Athletes Sports-recovery clients Wellness-center members Program 3: Body Shaping Support
A customized vibration program for suitable body-contouring and skin-texture concerns. Recommended applications: Abdomen treatments Thigh treatments Upper-arm programs Cellulite-appearance support Recommended for: Body-contouring studios Beauty salons Aesthetic wellness clinics Clients seeking non-invasive body care Program 4: Vacuum-Heating Body Care
An optional program combining vibration, vacuum suction and controlled heating. Recommended applications: Abdomen and waist Thighs Buttocks Upper arms Recommended for: Advanced body-care packages Cellulite-appearance treatments Skin-firming programs Clinics combining multiple contouring technologies Five Massage Heads for Customized Treatments
Five interchangeable heads provide different coverage patterns and massage sensations. The interchangeable heads allow operators to adapt the treatment pattern to the selected body area and client comfort. New clients should begin with a lower vibration intensity before the setting is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
The treatment handpiece and interchangeable heads support professional massage across multiple body areas. Upper-Body Treatments
Neck muscles Shoulders Upper back Lower back Upper arms Suitable side-body areas Core and Lower-Body Treatments
Abdomen Waist Thighs Buttocks Lower legs Calves Full-Body Wellness Programs
General relaxation Muscle-recovery support Circulation-focused massage Body-care treatments Post-workout wellness Maintenance-oriented services Professional Wellness and Body-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected head, vibration intensity, optional vacuum and heating settings and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected responses vary between clients. A complete health consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s health history, target areas, muscle condition, comfort level and contraindications. 2. Treatment-Head Selection
The appropriate massage head is selected and installed according to the operating manual. The operator confirms that the attachment is secure. 3. Parameter Selection
Vibration intensity, treatment duration and optional vacuum or heating settings are selected according to the client’s tolerance and professional protocol. 4. Massage Treatment
The operator moves the treatment handpiece across the selected body area using controlled pressure and the recommended technique. A typical session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes per area. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After the session, the treatment area is assessed and the client receives suitable hydration, activity and aftercare guidance. Temporary redness, warmth, tenderness, tingling or mild muscle fatigue may occur. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines adjustable vibration with five massage heads and portable professional controls. Key operating advantages include: Vibration and percussion massage Five interchangeable treatment heads Multiple adjustable intensity levels Optional 40K vacuum heating Digital touchscreen or control panel Ergonomic treatment handpiece Portable wheeled design Dual-voltage compatibility Technical Specifications
What Is Included?
The package includes the main machine, treatment handpiece, five massage heads and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One Vibration Massage Slimming Machine One professional treatment handpiece One Round Massage Head One Spiked Massage Head One Flat Massage Head One Textured Massage Head One Specialty Massage Head Head-connection components Optional vacuum-heating accessories for the selected model Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Treatment-head installation Head-selection guidance Vibration-intensity adjustment Vacuum and heating guidance where applicable Body-area treatment protocols Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup Control-panel operation Treatment-handpiece use Installation of all five massage heads Head selection by body area Vibration-intensity adjustment Optional vacuum operation Optional heating controls Client positioning Professional massage protocols Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Vibration Massage Slimming Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital control system Original treatment handpiece Vibration and percussion components Optional vacuum and heating components Handpiece-connection components Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-head installation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of treatment heads and consumable components Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional vibration massage equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active or suspected blood clots Deep-vein thrombosis Severe cardiovascular conditions Severe varicose veins in the treatment area Recent fractures Severe osteoporosis Acute inflammation or fever Open wounds or active infections Recent surgery Herniated discs or severe spinal conditions Reduced sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual The device must not be applied directly over the head, front or side of the neck, spine, kidneys, open wounds, acute injuries or other prohibited areas. Optional vacuum and heat settings require additional assessment of skin condition, circulation and heat sensitivity. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Professional spas Wellness clinics Body-contouring studios Fitness and recovery facilities Massage professionals Aesthetic centers Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their wellness services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the Vibration Massage Slimming Machine? Access Five Massage Heads
Five interchangeable heads allow operators to customize treatment coverage and massage sensation for different body areas. Treat Multiple Body Areas
The system supports professional massage for the arms, thighs, abdomen, legs, back, neck muscles and shoulders. Customize Every Session
Adjustable vibration intensity and optional vacuum-heating settings allow treatments to be adapted to client comfort and professional objectives. Expand Your Service Menu
The machine supports relaxation, muscle-recovery, body-care, cellulite-appearance and complementary contouring programs. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and customer support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does vibration massage work?
The machine delivers rapid mechanical vibration and percussion through the selected massage head. Intensity can be adjusted according to the treatment area and client comfort. What are the five massage heads used for?
The Round Head supports general massage, the Spiked Head provides more intensive stimulation, the Flat Head covers larger areas, the Textured Head supports localized massage and the Specialty Head is used for targeted protocols. Which body areas can be treated?
Suitable areas include the shoulders, back, upper arms, abdomen, waist, thighs, buttocks, legs and calves. How long does a treatment take?
A typical session lasts approximately 15–20 minutes per body area. Treating multiple areas may require additional time. Can the machine be used for relaxation only?
Yes. The system can be used for general muscle relaxation, stress-relief and professional wellness massage without including body-contouring protocols. What is the optional 40K vacuum-heating function?
The optional configuration combines vacuum suction and controlled heating with vibration massage for additional body-care and contour-refinement programs. Can it be combined with other body treatments?
The machine may be incorporated into professionally planned packages with suitable cavitation, RF or body-contouring services. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Vibration intensity is adjustable. Clients should feel controlled mechanical stimulation without pain. Settings should be reduced or treatment stopped if discomfort occurs. Is professional training included?
Professional training covers machine setup, treatment heads, intensity settings, optional vacuum heating, body protocols, cleaning and safety. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Professional Vibration Massage to Your Business
The Vibration Massage Slimming Machine combines: Adjustable vibration and percussion therapy Five interchangeable massage heads Optional 40K vacuum heating Professional relaxation and body-care applications Three-year parts warranty and customer support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its treatment heads, optional vacuum configuration and professional training. Order Your Vibration Massage Slimming Machine and Request Pricing
Massage Head
Recommended Application
Round Head
General massage and medium-sized body areas
Spiked Head
More intensive stimulation for suitable muscle groups
Flat Head
Broader coverage for the back, thighs and abdomen
Textured Head
Localized muscle tension and customized massage
Specialty Head
Targeted treatment according to professional protocol
Treatment Area
Applicable Treatment Head
Intended Wellness Application
Neck and shoulders
Round or Textured Head
Muscle-relaxation support
Back
Flat or Round Head
Broad-area massage
Upper arms
Round or Specialty Head
Massage and body-care support
Abdomen
Flat Head
General body-contouring support
Thighs
Flat or Spiked Head
Massage and texture-refinement support
Legs and calves
Round or Textured Head
Tired-muscle relaxation
Buttocks
Flat or Specialty Head
Body-care and massage programs
Localized muscle areas
Textured or Specialty Head
Targeted professional treatment
Specification
Details
Product Name
Vibration Massage Slimming Machine
Product Type
Professional vibration massage and body-wellness system
Primary Technology
Vibration and percussion therapy
Optional Technology
40K vacuum heating
Massage Heads
Five interchangeable heads
Head Types
Round, spiked, flat, textured and specialty
Vibration Intensity
Multiple adjustable levels
Session Duration
Approximately 15–20 minutes per area
Treatment Areas
Arms, thighs, abdomen, legs, back, neck and shoulders
Control Interface
Digital touchscreen or control panel
Power Supply
110V and 220V
Design
Ergonomic handpiece with optional wheeled cart
Portability
Lightweight and movable
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, overheat protection and intensity controls
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and customer assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Receives in 7 days.
$1,999.00
Professional Cold Fusional Plasma System
Ten Interchangeable Probes for Customized Skin-Care Treatments
The Cold Fusional Plasma Machine is a portable professional skin-care platform developed for dermatology clinics, medical spas, anti-aging centers and advanced beauty studios.
The system combines adjustable cold plasma technology with 10 interchangeable probe heads for surface treatments, localized applications, broader coverage and customized scar-appearance and skin-rejuvenation protocols.
Two multifunctional handles, a digital touchscreen, foot-switch operation and dedicated accessory racks support organized and efficient professional treatments.
Cold plasma technology | Ten interchangeable probes | Two treatment handles | Three-year warranty
Ten Interchangeable Probes on One Professional Platform Plasma Spray
The Plasma Spray Head provides broad, non-contact plasma application across suitable surface skin areas. Common applications include: General skin rejuvenation Dull-looking skin Surface skin conditioning Complexion-care programs Broad facial applications Maintenance-oriented treatments Square Tube Head
The Square Tube Head is designed for controlled treatment of broader skin areas. Common applications include: Cheeks Forehead Neck Décolletage Broad texture concerns General skin-conditioning protocols Flared Tube Head
The Flared Tube Head provides graduated plasma application across selected treatment zones. Common applications include: Medium-sized facial areas Surface skin care Customized intensity programs General rejuvenation Texture-refinement treatments Professional maintenance care Small Roller Needle
The Small Roller Needle supports professionally planned treatments for smaller areas and localized skin concerns. Common applications include: Fine-line appearance Small scar areas Localized texture concerns Precision skin-renewal programs Selected facial zones Customized professional protocols Large Roller Needle
The Large Roller Needle provides wider coverage for professionally selected scar and texture treatments. Common applications include: Larger scar areas Uneven-looking texture Broader skin-renewal programs Body scar appearance Professionally assessed treatment zones Customized advanced protocols 44P Pin Head
The 44P Pin Head provides multi-point contact for broader professional skin-care applications. Common applications include: General skin stimulation Texture-refinement programs Broad facial areas Skin-conditioning treatments Complexion-care programs Customized rejuvenation Ozone Plasma Head
The Ozone Plasma Head supports suitable professional cleansing and skin-conditioning protocols. Common applications include: Acne-prone skin care Oily-skin programs Clarifying treatments Surface skin conditioning Post-cleansing care Customized professional services Diamond-Shaped Head
The Diamond-Shaped Head is designed for controlled treatment of selected texture concerns and contoured areas. Common applications include: Uneven-looking skin texture Surface skin refinement Localized treatment zones Contour-area applications General rejuvenation Professional smoothing protocols Curved Needle Head
The Curved Needle Head supports precision treatment of contoured or difficult-to-reach areas. Common applications include: Curved facial zones Localized scar appearance Precision texture treatments Small treatment areas Contour-focused protocols Detailed professional work Straight Needle Head
The Straight Needle Head is designed for precise localized plasma application. Common applications include: Individual treatment points Small scar areas Localized skin imperfections Precision professional protocols Targeted texture concerns Detailed skin-care applications The appropriate probe, intensity, contact method and session duration should be selected according to the client’s skin condition, treatment area and professional protocol. Select the Right Probe Combination for Each Client
The system supports customized treatment pathways using one or more of its 10 probes. Program 1: General Skin Rejuvenation
A broad-treatment program for dull-looking skin and general complexion care. Recommended probes: Plasma Spray Square Tube Head Flared Tube Head 44P Pin Head Recommended for: Dull-looking skin General facial rejuvenation Complexion-care programs Professional maintenance treatments Program 2: Fine Lines and Wrinkles
A precision program for suitable facial lines and localized aging concerns. Recommended probes: Plasma Spray Small Roller Needle Curved Needle Head Straight Needle Head Recommended for: Fine-line appearance Forehead areas Suitable eye-contour areas Localized anti-aging programs Program 3: Scar Appearance and Texture
A customized program for appropriately selected scars and uneven-looking texture. Recommended probes: Small Roller Needle Large Roller Needle Diamond-Shaped Head Straight Needle Head Recommended for: Acne-scar appearance Suitable surgical scars Uneven-looking texture Localized skin-renewal programs Program 4: Acne-Prone and Oily Skin
A clarifying program for suitable acne-prone and oily skin. Recommended probes: Plasma Spray Ozone Plasma Head Square Tube Head 44P Pin Head Recommended for: Acne-prone skin Oily-looking skin Clarifying programs Professional skin-conditioning services Precision Probe Selection for Customized Treatments
Ten probes provide different coverage patterns for surface, localized and broader professional treatments. The adjustable settings and interchangeable probes give trained operators greater control over treatment coverage and intensity. New clients should begin with conservative settings before intensity or treatment coverage is increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
The system supports professional treatment of multiple facial and body areas. Facial Treatments
Forehead Cheeks Chin Jawline Suitable areas around the eyes General facial skin Neck and Upper-Body Treatments
Neck Décolletage Hands Suitable upper-chest areas Other professionally assessed zones Scar and Texture Treatments
Acne-scar areas Suitable surgical scars Localized body scars Uneven-looking skin texture Other professionally assessed concerns Professional Skin-Care Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected probe, intensity, treatment area and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s skin concerns, medical history, previous treatments, current products, healing response and contraindications. 2. Probe Selection and Preparation
The appropriate probe is selected and installed according to the operating manual. Reusable components are cleaned and disinfected, while single-use components are prepared according to infection-control requirements. 3. Parameter Selection
The practitioner selects the plasma intensity, operating method and session duration according to the treatment area, probe and client tolerance. 4. Cold Plasma Treatment
The selected probe is applied using the appropriate professional technique. A typical treatment takes approximately 5–10 minutes per area. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the skin is assessed and appropriate moisturizer, sunscreen or other aftercare products are recommended. Temporary redness, warmth, dryness, sensitivity or other short-term responses may occur depending on the probe and treatment intensity. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The system combines 10 interchangeable probes with two handles and digital controls for streamlined professional operation. Key operating advantages include: Cold fusional plasma technology Ten interchangeable probes Two multifunctional treatment handles Digital touchscreen control Adjustable treatment intensity Foot-switch operation Two accessory racks Portable and compact design Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main cold plasma system, two treatment handles, 10 probes and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One Cold Fusional Plasma Machine Two multifunctional plasma handles Plasma Spray Head Square Tube Head Flared Tube Head Small Roller Needle Large Roller Needle 44P Pin Head Ozone Plasma Head Diamond-Shaped Head Curved Needle Head Straight Needle Head Two accessory racks Foot switch Power cable USB power components where applicable English user manual Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine installation guidance Handle and probe installation Probe-selection guidance Intensity-adjustment instructions Professional treatment protocols Safety and contraindication guidance Cleaning and infection-control instructions Routine maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional training covers: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen navigation Handle installation Operation of all 10 probes Probe selection Treatment-area planning Intensity adjustment Client consultation Scar and texture protocols Acne-prone skin programs Cleaning and infection control Routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The Cold Fusional Plasma Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Digital touchscreen Plasma-generation components Original treatment handles Foot-switch components Handle and accessory connections Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect probe installation or operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of probes, needles and consumables Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional plasma equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete skin consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active cancer Active herpes simplex Open wounds or active skin infections Severe inflammatory skin conditions Recent surgery Recent laser treatments, chemical peels or aggressive exfoliation Photosensitivity or photosensitizing medication Bleeding disorders Poor wound healing A history of abnormal or keloid scarring Reduced skin sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Needle and roller probes require appropriate hygiene, disinfection and infection-control procedures. Single-use components must not be reused. Possible treatment responses may include redness, warmth, dryness, temporary irritation, swelling or sensitivity. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Dermatology clinics Medical spas Advanced skin-care studios Anti-aging specialists Aesthetic clinics Trained plasma practitioners Qualified healthcare professionals Professional beauty centers Businesses expanding their advanced skin services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the Cold Fusional Plasma Machine? Access Ten Professional Probes
The system includes 10 interchangeable probes for surface, broad-area, localized, scar-appearance and texture-refinement treatments. Customize Every Treatment
Different probe shapes and adjustable intensity settings allow practitioners to create area-specific professional protocols. Treat Multiple Skin Concerns
The system supports professional programs for fine lines, acne-scar appearance, suitable surgical scars, dull-looking skin and uneven texture. Improve Professional Workflow
Two handles, foot-switch operation, a digital touchscreen and two accessory racks support organized and efficient treatments. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is cold fusional plasma?
Cold fusional plasma is an ionized-gas technology used in professional skin-care treatments. The system delivers controlled plasma energy through different treatment probes. What probes are included?
The system includes a Plasma Spray, Square Tube, Flared Tube, Small Roller Needle, Large Roller Needle, 44P Pin Head, Ozone Plasma Head, Diamond-Shaped Head, Curved Needle Head and Straight Needle Head. Which probe is suitable for acne-scar appearance?
Roller or precision probes may be incorporated into professionally planned acne-scar protocols. Probe selection depends on scar type, skin condition and practitioner assessment. How long does a treatment take?
A typical treatment takes approximately 5–10 minutes per area. A session covering multiple areas may require additional time. Can the system be used for fine lines?
Yes. Plasma Spray, Square Tube and Small Roller probes may be incorporated into professional programs for suitable fine-line concerns. Is the treatment painless?
Client sensation varies according to the probe and intensity. Tingling, warmth, prickling or discomfort may occur. Is there downtime?
Recovery depends on the selected probe and treatment intensity. Temporary redness, warmth, dryness, sensitivity or swelling may occur. Can the machine be used on every skin type?
Every client requires professional assessment. Skin type, pigmentation risk, sensitivity, healing history and treatment area must be considered before treatment. Is professional training included?
Professional training covers machine setup, all 10 probes, intensity selection, treatment protocols, infection control, maintenance and safety. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Advanced Cold Plasma Treatments to Your Business
The Cold Fusional Plasma Machine combines: Professional cold plasma technology Ten interchangeable treatment probes Two multifunctional handles Portable touchscreen and foot-switch operation Three-year parts warranty and professional support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its probe options, package contents and professional training. Order Your Cold Fusional Plasma Machine and Request Pricing
Probe Category
Recommended Application
Spray and Tube Probes
Surface skin care and broader treatment coverage
Roller Probes
Professionally selected scar and texture protocols
Multi-Pin Probe
Broad multi-point skin-conditioning treatments
Ozone Plasma Probe
Clarifying and acne-prone skin-care programs
Precision Needle Probes
Localized and contoured treatment areas
Diamond-Shaped Probe
Texture-refinement and customized applications
Skin Concern
Applicable Probe
Intended Skin-Care Application
Dull-looking skin
Plasma Spray
General rejuvenation
Fine-line appearance
Small Roller or Spray
Anti-aging support
Acne-scar appearance
Roller or Precision Probe
Scar-appearance programs
Suitable surgical scars
Large Roller or Precision Probe
Texture-refinement support
Acne-prone skin
Ozone Plasma Head
Clarifying skin care
Uneven-looking texture
Diamond-Shaped or 44P Head
Surface-refinement programs
Broader facial areas
Square or Flared Tube
General skin conditioning
Contoured areas
Curved Needle Head
Precision professional treatment
Specification
Details
Product Name
Cold Fusional Plasma Machine
Product Type
Portable professional cold plasma system
Technology
Cold fusional plasma
Probe Heads
10 interchangeable probes
Main Handles
Two multifunctional handles
Treatment Duration
Approximately 5–10 minutes per area
Treatment Areas
Face, neck, décolletage, hands and suitable body scars
Primary Applications
Scar appearance, fine lines, texture, acne-prone skin and rejuvenation
Intensity
Adjustable professional settings
Control Interface
Digital touchscreen
Power Supply
USB or AC power configuration
Included Accessories
Two accessory racks and foot switch
Safety Features
Automatic shut-off, temperature monitoring and overload protection
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and technical assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Receives in 7 days.
$2,599.00
Professional Fibroblast Plasma Pen System
Precision Plasma Technology for Skin Tightening and Rejuvenation
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen is a professional aesthetic device developed for beauty clinics, medical spas, professional skin-care studios and qualified aesthetic practitioners.
The pen produces a controlled electrical arc between the device tip and the skin’s surface. This creates a localized thermal effect that supports professional skin-tightening, texture-refinement and rejuvenation protocols.
Its compact pen design allows trained practitioners to work precisely on selected facial and body areas according to the client’s skin condition and professional treatment plan.
Precision plasma arc | Targeted skin treatments | Professional operation | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Applications on One Plasma Platform Fine-Line and Wrinkle Treatments
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen supports professionally planned treatments for the appearance of suitable facial lines and wrinkles. Common applications include: Forehead-line appearance Suitable eye-area lines Crow’s-feet appearance Upper-lip lines Lower-face lines General anti-aging protocols Skin-Tightening Programs
The controlled plasma arc creates localized thermal effects on selected skin areas. Common applications include: Loose-looking facial skin Jawline skin tightening Suitable neck areas Forehead treatments Lower-face rejuvenation Professional firming programs Scar and Texture Refinement
The plasma pen can be incorporated into professional protocols intended to improve the appearance of selected scars and uneven-looking texture. Common applications include: Acne-scar appearance Suitable surgical scars Uneven-looking skin texture Localized skin imperfections Surface texture refinement Professional skin-renewal treatments Eye-Area Rejuvenation
The precision tip allows trained practitioners to work on appropriate areas surrounding the eyes. Common applications include: Upper-eye-area skin Lower-eye-area skin Crow’s-feet appearance Fine lines around the eyes Suitable brow-area treatments Professional eye-contour protocols Plasma energy must never be applied directly to the eye, eyeball, wet eyelid margin or other prohibited anatomical structures. The appropriate intensity, treatment pattern, point spacing and session duration should be selected according to the client’s skin type, treatment area and professional protocol. Select the Right Treatment Program for Each Client
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen supports customized protocols for different professional aesthetic objectives. Program 1: Fine Lines and Wrinkles
A precision-focused program for suitable facial lines and small treatment areas. Recommended applications: Forehead lines Crow’s-feet appearance Upper-lip lines Lower-face wrinkles Recommended for: Anti-aging clinics Professional skin-care studios Medical spas Clients seeking targeted rejuvenation Program 2: Facial Skin Tightening
A customized program for suitable areas of loose-looking facial skin. Recommended applications: Lower-face tightening Jawline skin Forehead areas Suitable neck areas Recommended for: Facial-rejuvenation services Professional firming programs Mature-looking skin Clients seeking non-surgical skin treatments Program 3: Scar-Appearance and Texture Care
A skin-renewal program for appropriately selected scars and uneven-looking texture. Recommended applications: Acne-scar appearance Suitable surgical scars Localized texture concerns Selected skin imperfections Recommended for: Professional scar-care protocols Texture-refinement treatments Skin-renewal programs Appropriately assessed clients Program 4: Eye-Contour Rejuvenation
A precision program for suitable skin around the eye area. Recommended applications: Upper-eye-area skin Lower-eye-area skin Crow’s-feet appearance Brow-area skin Recommended for: Eye-contour services Mature-looking eye areas Precision facial treatments Trained professional practitioners Precision Plasma Application for Customized Treatments
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen creates a controlled electrical arc that produces localized thermal effects at the skin’s surface. The practitioner must maintain appropriate spacing between plasma points and avoid overtreating the same area. New clients and sensitive treatment zones should begin with conservative parameters. Adjustable Treatment Areas
The precision pen supports professional treatments on selected facial and body areas. Facial Treatments
Forehead Cheeks Upper-lip area Lower face Jawline Other professionally assessed facial zones Eye-Contour Treatments Suitable upper-eye-area skin Suitable lower-eye-area skin Crow’s-feet area Brow-area skin Other approved surrounding zones Neck and Body Treatments
Suitable neck areas Décolletage Hands Localized scars Selected texture concerns Other professionally assessed skin areas Professional Skin-Rejuvenation Applications
The available treatments depend on the selected area, skin type, plasma intensity, application pattern and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected outcomes vary between clients. A complete skin consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Treatment Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The practitioner reviews the client’s skin concerns, medical history, previous treatments, healing response, tendency toward pigmentation or scarring and contraindications. 2. Skin Preparation
The treatment area is cleansed and prepared according to the professional protocol. An appropriate topical anesthetic may be used where permitted and clinically suitable. 3. Parameter and Pattern Selection
The practitioner selects an appropriate plasma intensity, point spacing, treatment pattern and session duration according to the client’s skin and treatment area. 4. Plasma Treatment
The pen is held at the required distance to create controlled plasma arcs across the selected treatment zone. The practitioner works precisely and avoids excessive overlapping. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the area is assessed and appropriate aftercare instructions are provided. A typical session may last approximately 30–60 minutes, depending on the size and number of treatment areas. Temporary redness, swelling, tenderness, crusting and visible treatment points are expected during healing. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The compact Fibroblast Plasma Pen supports precise operation in qualified professional aesthetic settings. Key operating advantages include: Controlled plasma-arc technology Precision pen-style applicator Targeted facial and body treatments Adjustable professional parameters Compact and portable design Multiple treatment-tip compatibility Localized treatment control Professional skin-rejuvenation applications Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the plasma pen and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One Fibroblast Plasma Pen Professional plasma treatment tips Tip-installation components Power adapter or charging equipment for the selected model Power cable where applicable Protective storage packaging English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Professional setup guidance Treatment-tip installation Intensity-selection guidance Treatment-pattern guidance Point-spacing instructions Facial and body treatment guidance Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Professional operating guidance covers: Device setup Treatment-tip installation Intensity selection Plasma-arc control Treatment-point spacing Facial-area mapping Eye-contour precautions Skin-type assessment Client consultation Contraindication screening Post-treatment care Cleaning and routine maintenance Basic troubleshooting The operator must also meet all professional training, qualification and licensing requirements applicable in the intended market. Three-Year Warranty
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen is supported by a three-year limited warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main plasma pen unit Internal electronic components Plasma-generation components Intensity-control system Original charging or power components Other eligible components supplied with the device Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Setup guidance for eligible replacement components Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect treatment-tip installation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or power connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of treatment tips and consumables Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, device serial information, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to the official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen intentionally creates controlled thermal injury at the skin’s surface. It is a professional treatment device and should only be operated by appropriately trained and legally authorized practitioners. A complete skin consultation and contraindication assessment must be performed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for clients with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active cancer Active herpes simplex Open wounds or active skin infections Severe inflammatory skin conditions Recent surgery Recent laser treatments or chemical peels Recent isotretinoin use Bleeding disorders Poor wound healing A history of abnormal or keloid scarring Higher risk of post-inflammatory pigmentation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Possible treatment responses and complications include: Redness Swelling Tenderness Crusting Temporary treatment marks Pigmentation changes Infection Delayed healing Burns Scarring Plasma energy must never be applied directly to the eyes, wet eyelid margin, mucous membranes or other prohibited anatomical areas. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Professional aesthetic clinics Medical spas Qualified skin-care studios Trained plasma practitioners Appropriate healthcare professionals Professional anti-aging centers Clinics offering targeted skin treatments Businesses expanding their advanced aesthetic services This device is not intended for casual, untrained or unsupervised home use. Why Choose the Fibroblast Plasma Pen? Provide Precision Treatments
The compact pen and controlled plasma arc allow trained practitioners to work on localized wrinkles, scars and skin-texture concerns. Treat Multiple Skin Areas
The system supports professional protocols for selected areas of the face, eye contour, jawline, neck, hands and body. Customize Every Session
Adjustable intensity, treatment-point spacing and application patterns allow treatments to be adapted to the client’s skin and professional objectives. Expand Your Service Menu
The device can support professional fine-line, skin-tightening, scar-appearance, eye-contour and texture-refinement services. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year limited warranty, professional operating guidance and technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
What is a Fibroblast Plasma Pen?
A Fibroblast Plasma Pen creates a controlled electrical arc between the device tip and the skin’s surface. This produces localized thermal effects used in professional aesthetic skin treatments. How does plasma treatment support skin tightening?
The controlled thermal treatment creates localized skin contraction and initiates a healing response. The appearance of the treated area may continue changing during recovery and remodeling. Which areas can be treated?
Suitable areas may include the forehead, cheeks, upper-lip area, eye contour, lower face, jawline, neck, hands and selected scars. How long does a session take?
A typical treatment lasts approximately 30–60 minutes. The exact duration depends on the size and number of treatment areas. Is plasma pen treatment painless?
No. The procedure can cause heat, stinging or discomfort. An appropriate topical anesthetic may be used by a qualified professional where permitted. Is there downtime?
Yes. Redness, swelling, tenderness, crusting and visible treatment points may occur. Recovery time varies according to treatment intensity, area and individual healing response. When may clients notice results?
Some contraction may be visible after treatment, while additional changes may develop during healing. Outcomes and timelines vary between clients. Are results permanent?
No permanent result should be guaranteed. The natural aging process continues, and maintenance or additional treatment may be required. Can the device be used on every skin type?
No. Some skin types have a higher risk of pigmentation changes or scarring. Every client requires careful professional skin assessment before treatment. Can the Plasma Pen be used at home?
No. Plasma treatment creates controlled thermal injury and should only be performed by an appropriately trained and legally authorized professional. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The limited warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved device components, subject to the official warranty policy. Treatment tips, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Add Precision Plasma Treatments to Your Professional Services
The Fibroblast Plasma Pen combines: Controlled plasma-arc technology Precision point-by-point application Professional facial and body protocols Targeted skin-tightening and texture-refinement services Three-year limited warranty and technical support Contact Wikbeauty to order the Fibroblast Plasma Pen or receive more information about its professional operation and package contents. Order Your Fibroblast Plasma Pen and Request Pricing
Treatment Approach
Recommended Application
Lower-Intensity Application
Small areas, initial protocols and suitable delicate zones
Moderate Application
General professional skin-tightening treatments
Targeted Point Pattern
Localized wrinkles, scars and texture concerns
Customized Treatment Pattern
Area-specific protocols based on professional assessment
Skin Concern
Applicable Treatment
Intended Aesthetic Application
Fine-line appearance
Precision plasma pattern
Targeted facial rejuvenation
Forehead wrinkles
Customized point application
Wrinkle-appearance improvement
Crow’s-feet appearance
Conservative eye-area protocol
Eye-contour rejuvenation
Loose-looking facial skin
Skin-tightening pattern
Firming and contour support
Jawline skin
Targeted plasma treatment
Lower-face rejuvenation
Scar appearance
Localized treatment pattern
Texture-refinement support
Uneven-looking texture
Customized plasma application
Skin-renewal program
Aging-looking hands
Professional hand protocol
Texture and rejuvenation support
Specification
Details
Product Name
Fibroblast Plasma Pen
Product Type
Professional plasma skin-treatment device
Technology
Controlled electrical plasma arc
Primary Applications
Skin tightening, fine-line care, scar-appearance and texture-refinement treatments
Treatment Areas
Selected areas of the face, eye contour, jawline, neck, hands and body
Treatment Duration
Approximately 30–60 minutes
Operation
Precision point-by-point plasma application
Intensity
Adjustable according to the selected device configuration
Treatment Tips
Interchangeable professional plasma tips
Design
Compact handheld pen
Intended Users
Appropriately trained professional operators
Warranty
Three-year limited warranty
Support
Professional operating guidance and technical assistance
Receives in 7 days.
$1,299.00
Professional Three-in-One Pressotherapy System
Far-Infrared Heat, Pneumatic Compression and EMS Muscle Stimulation
The 3-in-1 Pressotherapy Machine is a multifunctional wellness platform developed for beauty salons, medical spas, wellness clinics, postpartum recovery centers and sports-recovery studios.
The system combines far-infrared heat, pneumatic air-pressure massage and electrical muscle stimulation. Its full-body compression suit contains 20 air chambers for controlled sequential pressure across multiple body areas.
Four operating modes and independent temperature and pressure controls allow trained operators to customize treatments according to the client’s comfort and professional wellness objectives.
Three treatment technologies | Twenty air chambers | Four operating modes | Three-year warranty
Four Professional Functions on One Pressotherapy Platform Far-Infrared Heat
The far-infrared function provides adjustable warmth across suitable areas covered by the treatment suit. Common applications include: General body warming Muscle relaxation Circulation-focused wellness Body-care programs Relaxation treatments Recovery-oriented sessions Pneumatic Compression Massage
Twenty air chambers inflate and deflate in programmed sequences to provide controlled compression across the body. Common applications include: Lymphatic-drainage support Tired-leg programs Temporary water-retention support General circulation-focused wellness Full-body relaxation Recovery-oriented treatments EMS Muscle Stimulation
The EMS function applies controlled electrical impulses to suitable muscle groups. Common applications include: Muscle-stimulation programs General muscle conditioning Body-toning support Post-workout wellness Fitness-oriented services Customized recovery protocols Independent Zone Control
Temperature and pressure can be adjusted independently for different body zones. Common operating applications include: Customized upper-body pressure Customized lower-body pressure Independent temperature adjustment Client-comfort management Targeted wellness programs Personalized treatment sequences The appropriate operating mode, pressure, temperature, EMS intensity and session duration should be selected according to the client’s condition, tolerance and professional protocol. Select the Right Operating Mode for Each Client
The system provides four customizable operating modes. The appropriate mode should be selected following consultation and contraindication assessment. Mode A: Gentle Relaxation
A lower-intensity program designed for comfort-focused and first-time treatments. Recommended applications: General relaxation Light compression massage First-time sessions Gentle body-wellness programs Recommended for: New clients Fatigued professionals Relaxation-focused spa clients Clients who prefer gentle pressure Mode B: Lymphatic-Drainage Support
A sequential compression program for professionally planned fluid-movement and circulation-focused treatments. Recommended applications: Tired-leg programs Temporary water-retention support General lymphatic wellness Full-body compression massage Recommended for: Wellness-center clients Beauty-spa programs Suitable recovery services Maintenance-oriented treatments Mode C: Body-Conditioning Support
A moderate-intensity program combining compression, heat and suitable EMS settings. Recommended applications: Body-toning support General muscle stimulation Circulation-focused body care Wellness and fitness programs Recommended for: Weight-management clients Fitness and wellness centers Body-care packages Professionally assessed users Mode D: Recovery Program
A customizable program designed for appropriately selected athletic and muscle-recovery applications. Recommended applications: Post-workout wellness Tired-muscle relaxation Lower-body recovery General fatigue-relief programs Recommended for: Athletes Sports-recovery studios Fitness facilities Active-lifestyle clients Twenty Air Chambers for Customized Compression
The full-body pressotherapy suit contains 20 air chambers that inflate and deflate according to the selected mode. Independent zone control gives trained operators greater flexibility over pressure, temperature and treatment coverage. New clients should begin with gentler pressure, lower temperature and reduced EMS intensity before the settings are increased gradually. Adjustable Treatment Areas
The full-body suit supports professional treatment of multiple body zones. Upper-Body Treatments
Arms Upper back Waist Suitable torso areas Other professionally assessed zones Lower-Body Treatments
Thighs Lower legs Calves Feet Gluteal areas Suitable lower-body zones Full-Body Programs
General relaxation Lymphatic-drainage support Muscle-stimulation programs Recovery-oriented sessions Body-care treatments Wellness-maintenance programs Professional Wellness and Recovery Applications The available treatments depend on the selected operating mode, pressure, temperature, EMS intensity and professional protocol. Treatment suitability and expected responses vary between clients. A complete health consultation should be performed before every treatment. How a Professional Session Works 1. Client Consultation
The operator reviews the client’s health history, treatment objectives, current condition and contraindications. The appropriate operating mode and treatment zones are then selected. 2. Suit Preparation
The client is positioned comfortably, and the full-body suit is fitted correctly. Air hoses, EMS connections and temperature-control components are connected according to the operating manual. 3. Parameter Selection
The operator selects Mode A, B, C or D and adjusts the pressure, temperature, EMS intensity and session duration according to the client’s comfort. 4. Three-in-One Treatment
The system delivers controlled far-infrared warmth, sequential pneumatic compression and EMS stimulation according to the selected program. A typical session lasts approximately 30–45 minutes. 5. Post-Treatment Guidance
After treatment, the suit is removed and the client receives appropriate hydration, activity and aftercare guidance. Temporary warmth, pressure marks, increased urination, tingling, muscle fatigue or mild soreness may occur. Designed for Professional Treatment Environments
The machine combines three wellness technologies with intelligent touchscreen controls for streamlined professional operation. Key operating advantages include: Far-infrared heat Pneumatic compression massage EMS muscle stimulation Full-body suit with 20 air chambers Four operating modes Independent zone control Adjustable temperature and pressure Professional touchscreen interface Technical Specifications What Is Included?
The package includes the main pressotherapy unit, full-body treatment suit and required operating accessories. Standard Equipment
One 3-in-1 Pressotherapy control system One full-body 20-air-chamber suit Pneumatic air hoses EMS connection components Temperature-control components Suit connectors and accessories Power cable English user manual Operating guidance Documentation and Training
English operating manual Remote professional training Machine setup guidance Suit-fitting instructions Air-hose connection guidance Mode-selection guidance Pressure and temperature adjustment EMS-intensity guidance Independent zone-control training Safety and contraindication instructions Cleaning and maintenance guidance Basic troubleshooting assistance Training certificate after completion Professional Training and Ongoing Support
Wikbeauty provides professional guidance to help buyers understand: Machine installation and setup Touchscreen navigation Full-body suit fitting Air-hose installation EMS connection and placement Operation of Modes A–D Pressure adjustment Temperature adjustment Independent zone control Client-comfort monitoring Cleaning and routine maintenance Safety procedures Basic troubleshooting A professional training certificate is provided after successful completion. Three-Year Warranty
The 3-in-1 Pressotherapy Machine is supported by a three-year parts warranty, providing long-term protection for your equipment investment. Warranty Coverage
Subject to the official warranty terms, eligible manufacturing defects involving the following components may be covered: Main machine unit Internal electronic components Touchscreen and control system Internal air compressor Temperature-control components EMS control components Original air hoses and connectors Other eligible parts supplied with the machine Technical Support Process
If a technical issue occurs, the Wikbeauty support team will assist with: Remote inspection and fault identification Guided troubleshooting Confirmation of the affected component Warranty-eligibility review Replacement-part assistance when covered Installation guidance for eligible replacement parts Warranty Exclusions
The warranty does not normally cover: Accidental or cosmetic damage Damage caused by misuse Incorrect suit or connector operation Unauthorized repairs or modifications Incorrect voltage or electrical connection Improper cleaning, storage or maintenance Normal wear of the suit, EMS pads and consumable items Damage caused by failure to follow the user manual Shipping or transportation arranged without authorization The original order details, machine serial number, images and diagnostic videos may be required when requesting service. Full coverage remains subject to Wikbeauty’s official warranty policy. Safety and Contraindications
This system is professional pressotherapy and EMS equipment and should only be operated by appropriately trained personnel. A complete health assessment and contraindication review must be completed before treatment. Treatment may not be suitable for individuals with: Pregnancy or suspected pregnancy Pacemakers or implanted electronic devices Active or suspected blood clots Deep-vein thrombosis Severe cardiovascular conditions Severe varicose veins Unexplained edema Acute inflammation or fever Active cancer Open wounds or active infections Recent surgery Severe heat sensitivity Reduced sensation Uncontrolled medical conditions Other contraindications listed in the operating manual Postpartum clients require appropriate medical clearance before treatment. Abdominal pressure, infrared heat and EMS settings must be selected carefully according to recovery status. The selected pressure, temperature and EMS intensity must remain comfortable throughout treatment. This is not an exhaustive contraindication list. Operators must follow the user manual, applicable professional standards and local regulations. Medical advice should be obtained whenever client suitability is uncertain. Intended Professional Users
This system is suitable for: Beauty salons Medical spas Wellness clinics Postpartum recovery centers Sports-recovery studios Fitness facilities Professional massage providers Trained independent practitioners Businesses expanding their wellness services This machine is not intended for untrained or casual home use. Why Choose the Three-in-One Pressotherapy Machine? Combine Three Wellness Technologies
The system combines far-infrared heat, pneumatic compression and EMS muscle stimulation in one professional platform. Provide Full-Body Coverage
The treatment suit includes 20 air chambers for controlled compression across multiple upper- and lower-body zones. Customize Every Session
Four operating modes and independent zone controls allow pressure, temperature and EMS intensity to be adapted to the client’s comfort. Expand Your Service Menu
The machine supports relaxation, lymphatic-drainage, muscle-stimulation, body-care and recovery-oriented programs. Protect Your Investment
The system includes a three-year parts warranty, CE and ISO certificates, professional training and technical support. Frequently Asked Questions
How does the three-in-one system work?
The machine combines adjustable far-infrared warmth, sequential pneumatic compression and EMS muscle stimulation in one treatment platform. What do the 20 air chambers provide?
The chambers inflate and deflate in programmed sequences to deliver controlled compression across multiple body areas. What is the difference between Modes A, B, C and D?
The four modes provide different pressure sequences and intensity patterns. Operators select the appropriate mode according to client comfort and treatment objectives. How long does a treatment take?
A typical professional session lasts approximately 30–45 minutes. The exact duration depends on the selected mode and customized settings. Can temperature and pressure be adjusted separately?
Yes. Independent zone controls allow trained operators to customize pressure and temperature for different body areas. Can postpartum clients receive treatment?
Postpartum treatment requires appropriate medical clearance. The recovery stage, delivery type and current health must be considered before applying compression, heat or EMS. Is the treatment uncomfortable?
Pressure, heat and EMS intensity are adjustable. The treatment should remain comfortable, and the operator should reduce the settings or stop treatment if discomfort occurs. Is there downtime?
Many suitable clients can resume normal activities shortly after treatment. Temporary warmth, pressure marks, tingling, increased urination or mild muscle fatigue may occur. Is professional training included?
Remote professional training covers machine setup, suit fitting, operating modes, pressure, temperature, EMS settings, zone control, cleaning and safety. A training certificate is provided. What does the three-year warranty cover?
The three-year parts warranty covers eligible manufacturing defects affecting approved machine components, subject to the official warranty policy. Consumables, accidental damage, misuse and unauthorized modifications are excluded. Does the machine include CE and ISO certificates?
CE and ISO certificates are included. Add Three-in-One Pressotherapy to Your Business
The 3-in-1 Pressotherapy Machine combines: Far-infrared heat therapy Twenty-chamber pneumatic compression EMS muscle stimulation Four customizable operating modes Three-year parts warranty and professional support Contact Wikbeauty to order the machine or receive more information about its operating modes, full-body suit and professional training. Order Your 3-in-1 Pressotherapy Machine and Request Pricing
Compression Zone
Recommended Application
Lower Legs
Tired-leg and recovery-focused treatments
Thighs
Lower-body compression and circulation support
Waist and Abdomen
Appropriately selected body-wellness programs
Arms and Upper Body
General compression and relaxation
Full Body
Comprehensive professional pressotherapy sessions
Client Objective
Applicable Technology
Intended Wellness Application
General relaxation
Infrared and pneumatic compression
Full-body comfort and relaxation
Tired legs
Pneumatic compression
Lower-body recovery support
Temporary water retention
Sequential compression
Fluid-movement support
Muscle conditioning
EMS
Controlled muscle stimulation
Post-workout recovery
Compression, heat and EMS
Athletic wellness support
Body-care programs
Three-in-one treatment
General contour and wellness support
Postpartum wellness
Gentle customized program
Professionally cleared recovery support
Fatigue relief
Heat and compression
Relaxation and body comfort
Specification
Details
Product Name
3-in-1 Pressotherapy Machine
Product Type
Professional multifunctional pressotherapy system
Primary Technologies
Far-infrared heat, pneumatic compression and EMS
Pressotherapy Suit
Full-body compression suit
Air Chambers
20
Operating Modes
Four modes: A, B, C and D
Zone Control
Independent temperature and pressure settings
Session Duration
Approximately 30–45 minutes
Maximum Power
350W
Voltage Options
100–110V and 220–240V
Electrical Frequency
50Hz and 60Hz
Control Interface
Professional touchscreen
Suit Material
Soft, breathable treatment material
Safety Features
Automatic deflation, overheat protection and pressure regulation
Warranty
Three-year parts warranty
Support
Professional training and technical assistance
Certificates
CE and ISO certificates
Receives in 7 days.
Elevate Your Practice
Shop by Treatment
Explore professional-grade machines crafted for every aesthetic and wellness need.
Top Sellers You Can't Miss
$999.00
Receives in 7 days.
$1,199.00
Receives in 7 days.
$1,129.00
Receives in 7 days.
$3,999.00
Receives in 7 days.
$1,299.00
Receives in 7 days.
Wait — here's $50 off your order
Looks like you left something behind. Complete your order now and take $50 off with code COMEBACK50 — no minimum purchase required.
- Choosing a selection results in a full page refresh.
- Opens in a new window.